FURUNO 1800C 1823C, 1833C, 1900C 1933C, 1943C, 1953C Marine Radar, GD-1900C Video Plotter Operator's Manual
Below you will find brief information for Marine Radar 1800C 1833C, Marine Radar 1900C 1933C, Marine Radar 1900C 1943C, Marine Radar 1900C 1953C and Video Plotter GD-1900C. These models are designed for marine navigation, providing a comprehensive suite of features for safety and efficiency. They offer advanced radar, plotter and sounder capabilities for navigating in diverse conditions. With a user-friendly interface, you can access various functions, including those for collision avoidance, navigation, and route planning.
Advertisement
Advertisement
MODEL 1823C MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1833C MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1933C MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1943C MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1953C MARINE RADAR
COLOR VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1900C
C
9 - 5 2 , A s h i h a r a - c h o ,
N i s h i n o m i y a , J a p a n
T e l e p h o n e : 0 7 9 8 - 6 5 - 2111
T e l e f a x : 0 7 9 8 - 6 5 - 4 2 0 0
A l l r i g h t s r e s e r v e d .
Printed in Japan
( H I M A )
P U B . N o . O M E - 3 5 0 3 0
M O D E L 1 8 3 3 C S E R & G D 1 9 0 0 C
Y o u r L o c a l A g e n t / D e a l e r
F I R S T E D I T I O N : A P R . 2 0 0 1
E 2 : A U G . 1 9 , 2 0 0 2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.
Turn off the radar power switch before servicing the antenna unit. Post a warning sign near the switch indicating it should not be turned on while the antenna unit is being serviced.
Prevent the potential risk of being struck by the rotating antenna and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.
Wear a safety belt and hard hat when working on the antenna unit.
Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar antenna mast.
Do not disassemble or modify the equipment.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can result.
Turn off the power immediately if water leaks into the equipment or the equipment is emitting smoke or fire.
Continued use of the equipment can cause fire or electrical shock.
Use the proper fuse.
Fuse rating is shown on the power cable.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage to the equipment.
Keep heater away from equipment.
Heat can alter equipment shape and melt the power cord, which can cause fire or electrical shock.
WARNING
Radio Frequency
Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance.
Distances at which RF radiation levels of
100 and 10 W/m 2 exist are given in the table below.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask your FURUNO representative or dealer to provide this feature.
MODEL
MODEL
1823C
MODEL
1833C
Distance to
100 W/m 2 point
Nil
Nil
MODEL
1933C
MODEL
1943C
MODEL
1953C
XN-12A
XN-13A
Worst case
0.20 m
Nil
Nil
Distance to
10 W/m 2 point
Worst case
0.50 m
Worst case
0.50 m
Worst case
3.00 m
Worst case
2.50 m
Worst case
2.50 m
Worst case
2.30 m
CAUTION
A warning label is attached to the equipment. Do not remove the label.
If the label is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer.
WARNING
Name: Warning Label (1)
To avoid electrical shock, do not remove cover. No user-serviceable parts inside.
Type: 86-003-1011-0
Code No.: 100-236-230 i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD....................................................................................................... viii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS............................................................................... x
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW..........................................................................1-1
1.1 Operating Controls....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Display unit controls.......................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Remote controller ............................................................................................. 1-4
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card.................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off ................................................................................................ 1-6
1.4 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Hue....................................................................... 1-7
1.4.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance ..................................................................... 1-7
1.4.2 Hue................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.5 Selecting a Display ...................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5.1 Display modes .................................................................................................. 1-9
1.5.2 Selecting a display.......................................................................................... 1-10
1.5.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens .................................... 1-11
1.5.4 Selecting image source................................................................................... 1-12
1.6 Trackball, Cursor........................................................................................................ 1-13
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as Destination ................................................ 1-14
1.8 Data Boxes ................................................................................................................ 1-15
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key........................................................ 1-15
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes.................................................................................. 1-16
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box ....................................................................... 1-16
1.9 Function Keys ............................................................................................................ 1-17
1.9.1 Executing a function ....................................................................................... 1-17
1.10 Simulation Display ................................................................................................... 1-18
2. RADAR OPERATION.....................................................................................2-1
2.1 Radar Display .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Tuning.......................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Adjusting the Gain........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works.................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.2 Adjusting A/C SEA ............................................................................................ 2-4
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter...................................................................................... 2-5
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN ..................................................................................... 2-5
2.7 Range Scale ................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.8 Pulselength .................................................................................................................. 2-7
ii
2.9 Presentation Mode .......................................................................................................2-8
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode ..........................................................................2-9
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes ..................................................................2-10
2.10 Measuring the Range ............................................................................................... 2-11
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings.................................................................... 2-11
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor............................................................................2-12
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM..............................................................................2-13
2.10.4 Erasing a VRM, VRM indication ....................................................................2-14
2.10.5 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes .......................................................................2-14
2.10.6 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes .........................................................................2-14
2.10.7 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes........................................................................2-14
2.11 Measuring the Bearing..............................................................................................2-14
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor .........................................................................2-14
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL ............................................................................2-14
2.11.3 Erasing an EBL, EBL indication .....................................................................2-15
2.11.4 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes .......................................................................2-15
2.11.5 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes .........................................................................2-15
2.11.6 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes ........................................................................2-15
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker...................................................................2-16
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference ....................................................................................2-16
2.14 Reducing Radar Interference....................................................................................2-17
2.15 Zoom........................................................................................................................2-18
2.15.1 Zooming in on radar targets ..........................................................................2-18
2.15.2 Zooming in on ARPA, TTM targets ................................................................2-18
2.16 Shifting the Picture ...................................................................................................2-19
2.16.1 Manual shift...................................................................................................2-19
2.16.2 Automatic shift...............................................................................................2-20
2.17 Using the Offset EBL ................................................................................................2-21
2.17.1 Predicting collision course .............................................................................2-21
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing two targets .........................................................2-22
2.18 Echo Trails ...............................................................................................................2-23
2.18.1 Trail time .......................................................................................................2-23
2.18.2 Starting echo trail ..........................................................................................2-23
2.18.3 Trail gradation ...............................................................................................2-24
2.18.4 Trail color ......................................................................................................2-24
2.18.5 Echo trail mode .............................................................................................2-25
2.19 Echo Stretch.............................................................................................................2-26
2.20 Echo Averaging ........................................................................................................2-27
2.21 Outputting TLL Data .................................................................................................2-28
2.22 Guard Alarm .............................................................................................................2-29
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone ...........................................................................2-29
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated ............................................................................2-30
2.22.3 Canceling the guard alarm ............................................................................2-30
2.23 Watchman ................................................................................................................2-31
2.23.1 How watchman works ...................................................................................2-31
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman ...............................................................................2-31
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval...............................................................2-31
2.24 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes...........................................................................2-32
iii
2.25 Waypoint Marker...................................................................................................... 2-33
2.26 ARP, TTM Operation ................................................................................................ 2-34
2.26.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM.................................................................. 2-35
2.26.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP) ............................................................ 2-36
2.26.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)........................................................... 2-37
2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets .............................................................. 2-38
2.26.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)...................................................................... 2-39
2.26.6 Displaying past position (ARP)...................................................................... 2-40
2.26.7 ARP, TTM target data.................................................................................... 2-41
2.26.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP) ................................................................................ 2-42
2.26.9 Lost target alarm (ARP) ................................................................................ 2-43
2.27 Interpreting the Radar Display.................................................................................. 2-44
2.27.1 General......................................................................................................... 2-44
2.27.2 False echoes ................................................................................................ 2-46
2.27.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) ..................................................... 2-48
2.27.4 RACON (Radar Beacon)............................................................................... 2-50
3. PLOTTER OPERATION .................................................................................3-1
3.1 Plotter Displays ............................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display ................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Compass display .............................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.3 Highway display................................................................................................ 3-5
3.1.4 Nav data display ............................................................................................... 3-6
3.2 Presentation Mode....................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.1 North-up ........................................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.2 Course-up......................................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3 Auto course-up ................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3 Shifting the Display ...................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4 Chart Scale .................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.5 Chart Cards ............................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.1 Chart card overview ........................................................................................ 3-10
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement........................................................................ 3-11
3.5.3 FURUNO and NavCharts™ ............................................................................ 3-12
3.5.4 C-MAP cards .................................................................................................. 3-14
3.6 Working with Track..................................................................................................... 3-18
3.6.1 Displaying track .............................................................................................. 3-18
3.6.2 Stopping, restating plotting of own ship track .................................................. 3-19
3.6.3 Changing track color....................................................................................... 3-20
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track...................................... 3-21
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting .......................................... 3-22
3.6.6 Erasing track................................................................................................... 3-23
3.7 Marks, Lines .............................................................................................................. 3-25
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line ....................................................................................... 3-25
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes................................................................................ 3-25
3.7.3 Selecting line type........................................................................................... 3-26
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines ....................................................................................... 3-27
3.8 Waypoints .................................................................................................................. 3-28
3.8.1 Entering waypoints ......................................................................................... 3-28
iv
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data ......................................................................................3-31
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints ...........................................................................................3-33
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts™) .................................3-34
3.8.5 Searching waypoints .......................................................................................3-35
3.9 Routes........................................................................................................................3-36
3.9.1 Creating routes................................................................................................3-36
3.9.2 Connecting routes ...........................................................................................3-40
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints .........................................................................................3-41
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route ...................................................................3-43
3.9.5 Erasing routes .................................................................................................3-43
3.10 Navigation ................................................................................................................3-44
3.10.1 Navigating to a "quick point"..........................................................................3-44
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints ................................................................................3-45
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts™ only) ...................................3-46
3.10.4 Following a route...........................................................................................3-48
3.10.5 Canceling route navigation ............................................................................3-51
3.11 Alarms .....................................................................................................................3-52
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off..........................................................................................3-52
3.11.2 Arrival alarm ..................................................................................................3-53
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm .......................................................................................3-54
3.11.4 XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm ......................................................................3-55
3.11.5 Speed alarm ..................................................................................................3-55
3.11.6 Proximity alarm..............................................................................................3-56
3.11.7 Trip alarm ......................................................................................................3-57
3.11.8 Alarm information ..........................................................................................3-58
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance ............................................................................................3-60
4 VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION.....................................................................4-1
4.1 Principle of Operation ...................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Sounder Displays .........................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Selecting a sounder display...............................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Description of sounder displays.........................................................................4-3
4.2.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays ......................................4-8
4.3 Automatic Sounder Operation ......................................................................................4-9
4.3.1 How the automatic sounder works.....................................................................4-9
4.3.2 Types of automatic sounder modes...................................................................4-9
4.3.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation............................................................4-10
4.4.1 Selecting the manual mode .............................................................................4-10
4.4.2 Selecting display range ...................................................................................4-10
4.4.3 Adjusting the gain............................................................................................4-10
4.4.4 Shifting the range ............................................................................................ 4-11
4.5 Measuring Depth, Time ..............................................................................................4-12
4.6 Reducing Interference ................................................................................................4-13
4.7 Reducing Low Level Noise .........................................................................................4-14
4.8 Erasing Weak Echoes ..............................................................................................4-15
4.9 White Marker..............................................................................................................4-16
v
4.10 Picture Advance Speed ............................................................................................ 4-17
4.10.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed ................................................... 4-17
4.10.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed .............................................. 4-18
4.11 Display Colors .......................................................................................................... 4-19
4.12 Alarms...................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.12.1 Audio alarm on/off ......................................................................................... 4-20
4.12.2 Bottom alarm ................................................................................................ 4-21
4.12.3 Fish alarm..................................................................................................... 4-21
4.12.4 Fish alarm (B/L) ............................................................................................ 4-22
4.12.5 Water temperature alarm .............................................................................. 4-23
4.12.6 When an alarm setting is violated... .............................................................. 4-24
4.13 Water Temperature Graph........................................................................................ 4-25
4.14Interpreting the Sounder Display............................................................................... 4-26
4.14.1 Zero line........................................................................................................ 4-26
4.14.2 Bottom echo ................................................................................................. 4-26
4.14.3 Fish school echoes ....................................................................................... 4-27
4.14.4 Surface noise/Aeration.................................................................................. 4-27
5 CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT ...........................................................................5-1
5.1 General Setup.............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Radar Setup................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.1 Radar display setup .......................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Radar range setup ............................................................................................ 5-6
5.2.3 Function key setup............................................................................................ 5-7
5.3 Plotter Setup ................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.3.1 Navigation options ............................................................................................ 5-9
5.3.2 Function key setup.......................................................................................... 5-10
5.4 Chart Setup................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.4.1 Chart offset ..................................................................................................... 5-12
5.4.2 FURUNO, Nav-Charts™ chart attributes......................................................... 5-13
5.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes.................................................................................... 5-15
5.5 Data Boxes Setup ...................................................................................................... 5-18
5.6 Hot Page Setup ......................................................................................................... 5-19
5.7 Navigator Setup ......................................................................................................... 5-21
5.7.1 Navigation data source ................................................................................... 5-21
5.7.2 GPS receiver setup......................................................................................... 5-22
5.7.3 TD display setup ............................................................................................. 5-26
5.8 Nav Data Display Setup ............................................................................................. 5-28
5.9 Sounder Setup........................................................................................................... 5-29
5.9.1 System setup.................................................................................................. 5-29
5.9.2 Sensor setup .................................................................................................. 5-31
5.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range............................................ 5-32
5.9.4 Function key setup.......................................................................................... 5-33
vi
6 DATA TRANSFER ...........................................................................................6-1
6.1 Memory Card Operations .............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Saving data to a memory cards .........................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card...........................................................................6-2
6.1.3 Playing back from a memory card .....................................................................6-4
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data ......................................................................................6-5
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the PC .......................................................6-5
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data .........................................................................6-5
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman...........................................................................6-8
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment .......................................................................6-9
6.5 Outputting Data Trough the Network ..........................................................................6-10
7 MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING........................................................7-1
7.1 Preventive Maintenance ...............................................................................................7-1
7.2 Replacement of Battery ................................................................................................7-1
7.3 Replacement of Fuse ...................................................................................................7-2
7.4 Trackball Maintenance .................................................................................................7-2
7.5 Simple Troubleshooting ................................................................................................7-6
7.5.1 General .............................................................................................................7-3
7.5.2 Radar ................................................................................................................7-3
7.5.3 Plotter ...............................................................................................................7-4
7.5.4 Sounder ............................................................................................................7-5
7.6 Diagnostics...................................................................................................................7-6
7.6.1 Memory I/O test.................................................................................................7-6
7.6.2 Test pattern .......................................................................................................7-9
7.6.3 Keyboard, remote controller test .....................................................................7-10
7.7 GPS Status Display .................................................................................................... 7-11
7.8 Cleaning Memories ....................................................................................................7-12
7.8 Error Messages..........................................................................................................7-13
APPENDIX......................................................................................................... A-1
Menu Overview ................................................................................................................. A-1
Geodetic Chart List ......................................................................................................... A-12
World Time Chart ............................................................................................................ A-13
Icons ............................................................................................................................... A-14
SBAS Coverage Area...................................................................................................... A-15
SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................. SP-1
INDEX ......................................................................................................... Index-1
DECLARATION OF COMFORMITY
vii
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the Model 1800C/1900C Series
Marine Radar, GD-1900C Color Video Plotter
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the Model 1800C/1900C Series
Marine Radar, GD-1900C Color Video Plotter. We are confident you will discover why the
FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance procedures set forth in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
The example screens shown in this manual may not match the screens you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and equipment settings.
Note: SBAS is currently in the developmental phase and SBAS providers are expected to have initial operations capability as shown below. During the developmental phase the accuracy, integrity, continuity, or availability of the SBAS signal cannot be guaranteed.
Therefore, any position data should be verified against other sources to confirm reliability.
WAAS (N. America): Wide Area Augmentation System, 2003
EGNOS (Europe): European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service, 2004
MSAS (Japan): MTSAT Satellite based Augmentation System, 2005
WAAS, available in North America, is a provider in the worldwide SBAS (Satellite Based
Augmentation System) navigation system. SBAS provides GPS signal corrections to SBAS users, for even better position accuracy, typically better than three meters. Two more SBAS providers are also currently under development, MSAS (Multi-Functional Satellite
Augmentation System) for Japan and EGNOS (Euro Geostationary Navigation Overlay
Service) for Europe. All providers will be compatible with one another, thus providing
“seamless” position fixes to SBAS users. For coverage area, see “SBAS Coverage Area” in the Appendix. Unless otherwise noted, this manual uses “WAAS” when referring to any
SBAS provider.
viii
Features
The 1800C/1900C series of radars and video plotters work within our new product-network system called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate with NavNet compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol through an Ethernet
10BASE-T network.
The main features are as follows:
•
The 1800C/1900C series of radars and video plotters consists of the following models:
Marine Radar Model 1823C
Marine Radar Model 1833C
Marine Radar Model 1933C
Marine Radar Model 1943C
Marine Radar Model 1953C
Color Video Plotter GD-1900C
2 kW
4 kW
4 kW
6 kW
12 kW
—
Radar
Range
Antenna
24 nm
36 nm
1.5 ft Radome
2 ft Radome
48 nm
64 nm
72 nm
—
3.5 ft Open
4 ft Open
4/6 ft, Open
—
•
Bright 10.4” screen visible even under direct sunlight.
•
User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys, alphanumeric keys and trackball.
•
Accepts FURUNO and Nav-charts™ (NAVIONICS) charts, or C-MAP charts, depending on specification.
•
Fast chart redraw.
•
Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.
•
Video input (video recorder, CCD device, etc.) available with installation of optional PIP
Board.
•
12-channel GPS Receiver GP-310B with highly accurate position fixing optionally available, GP-320B with WAAS capability.
•
User programmable function keys.
•
Video sounder picture available with connection of the optional Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N.
ix
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each NavNet product on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T). Each NavNet product is assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images between other NavNet products. For example, video plotter pictures can be transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures received via the NavNet may be adjusted at the receiving end.
A NavNet system may consist of up to four display units and one network sounder. For a system incorporating three or more products, a “hub” is required to process data.
NavNet system (Model 1833C/1933C/1943C/1953C)
MODEL1953C
Antenna Unit
MODEL1943C MODEL1823C
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
MODEL1933C
MODEL1833C
Power Supply
Unit PSU-005
Display unit
RDP-138*/139
Echo sounder
Navigator
External buzzer
PC
Echo sounder
VGA monitor
Remote display
Video equipment
Heading sensor
Rectifier
RU-3423
Ship's mains 12 - 24 VDC**
100/110/115/220/230 VAC
1
φ
, 50/60 Hz**
Network
Sounder
ETR-6/10N
*: Not available for MODEL 1953C.
**: The power for the power supply unit
and display unit must be drawn from
the same power source.
Other NavNet unit
(GD-1900C etc.)
NavNet system (Model 1823C/1833C/1933C/1943C/1953C) x
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1900C)
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
Remote
Controller
RMC-100
Display unit
RDP-138/139
External buzzer
PC
Echo sounder
VGA monitor
Remote display
Video equipment
Echosounder
Navigator
Other NavNet Unit
(Model 1833C, etc.)
: Standard
: Option
Network
Sounder
ETR-6/10N
Rectifier
PR-62
12 - 24 VDC
Ship's mains
100/110/220/230 VAC
1
φ
, 50/60 Hz
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1900C) xi
Two-unit NavNet system
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
RADAR or
PLOTTER
RADAR or
PLOTTER
Radar, plotter data
Radar, plotter data
Two-unit NavNet system
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 display unit and one network sounder capable display units)
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
RADAR or
PLOTTER
RADAR or
PLOTTER
Radar data
Plotter data
HUB
Network
Sounder
Sounder data
ETR-6/10N (option)
Note: The picture disappears
10 seconds after the NavNet cable is disconnected from a
"sub" NavNet display unit.
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system
xii
This chapter provides the basic information needed to get you started using your radar, video plotter. The following topics are presented:
•
Control overview
•
Chart card insertion
•
Power on/off
•
Brilliance and hue adjustments
•
Display selection
•
MOB (Man OverBoard) mark entry
•
Data boxes
•
Function keys
•
Simulation display
NOTICE
The brilliance of the LCD is adjustable to match a wide variety of lighting conditions. However, its maximum setting may not be sufficiently bright to permit viewing of the display with polarized sunglasses.
The high-resolution model may show afterglow after several hours of continuous use in the same mode. This is not a sign of malfunction.
Note: The example screens shown in this manual may not match the screens you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and equipment settings.
1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Overview of display unit controls
The radar, video plotter, sounder and chart systems are operated with the controls of the display unit (and the remote controller). Ten keys are labeled and they provide the function shown on their labels. The five soft keys provide various functions according to current operating mode. The [ENTER] knob mainly functions to register selections on the menu and adjust the EBL, VRM and gain. The trackball’s main function is to move the cursor across the screen.
When you correctly execute an operation, the unit generates a beep. Invalid operation causes the unit to emit three beeps.
Displays the mode selection window.
Momentary press:
Registers own ship’s position as a waypoint.
Press three seconds:
Marks man overboard position.
Soft keys
Shows or hides the soft keys, function keys, nav data alternately.
Trackball
Shifts cursor EBL/VRM and cursor; selects menu items and options.
ABC
1
JKL
4
STU
7
EBL
VRM
DEF
2
MNO
5
VWX
8
_'#
0
GHI
3
PQR
6
YZ&
9
GAIN
Opens/closes the alarm menu.
Clears data; erases selected mark.
Opens/closes the main menu.
Selects a range.
ENTER knob
Push: Registers setting.
Rotate: Adjusts, gain, VRM, EBL, etc.; selects menu items and options. May also be used to enter alphanumeric data.
Enter alphanumeric data.
Radar: Displays the soft keys for adjustment of gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and FTC (Model 1700 series radar only).
Sounder: Adjusts gain.
Long press: Turns power off.
Momentary press: Turns the power on; opens the display for adjustment of brilliance and hue; shows RADAR STBY/TX soft key.
Chart drive
Displays soft keys for EBL/VRM.
Control panel
1-2
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Soft keys
The function of the five soft keys changes according to the operation. Their labels for their current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the keys.
To hide or show the soft keys, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key. Each press of the key shows preset soft keys, user function keys or turns off navigation information
(at the top of the screen).
SOFT
KEYS
3nm 12/
H-UP
Display unit
Some soft keys show the current station of the soft key function in reverse video as shown below.
319. 9
°
M
TRAIL
TRAIL
ON / OFF
TRAIL
TIME
GRAD
SINGLE
TRAIL
COLOR
34
°
22. 3456'N 359.9
°
M
TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
RETURN
WP-002 FISH
BRIDGE
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Current option shown in reverse video
Radar Display Plotter Display
Radar and plotter displays
1-3
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Operating distance
90
°
: Up to 5 m
±
45
°
: Up to 3 m
SAVE
RANGE
ABC 1
JKL
4
STU
7
EBL/VRM
WPT
DEF 2
MNO
5
VWX
8
’# 0
DISP MOB
Replace the batteries (AA) when the distance from which the display unit can be operated shortens.
GHI 3
PQR
6
YZ&
9
GAIN
CENTER
Note: The remote controller may become damaged if dropped.
Mishandling of the remote controller is not covered by the warranty.
MARK
ENT
CNTL
ENT
CLEAR MENU
BRILL TONE TX/STBY ACQ
ALARM HIDE/SHOW
SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5
Remote controller
.
Key Function Key Function
RANGE
DISP
Same as RANGE key on display unit.
Same as DISP key on display unit.
ENT
CLEAR
Same as ENTER knob on display unit.
Same as CLEAR key on display unit.
MENU SAVE MOB Same as SAVE/MOB key on display unit.
Ten keys
EBL/VRM
Enter alphanumerics.
GAIN
WPT
Same as EBL/VRM key on display unit.
Same as GAIN key on display unit.
Displays “alphabet” WPT list on plotter display.
BRILL
TX/STBY
ACQ
Same as MENU key on display unit.
Adjusts display brilliance.
Toggles radar between standby and transmit.
Acquires radar target.
(Requires radar source equipped with ARP.)
MARK ENT Same as MARK ENTRY soft key.
CENTER
CNTL
Returns own ship to screen center on plotter display.
Switches control between displays on combination displays.
ALARM Same as ALARM key on the display unit.
HIDE/SHOW Same as HIDE/SHOW key on display unit.
SK1 – SK5
(soft keys)
Same as soft keys on display unit.
1-4
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card
Your unit reads FURUNO and Nav-Charts ™ (NAVIONICS) chart cards, or
C-MAP chart cards, depending on the type of display unit you have. Insert the appropriate chart card for your area as follows:
1. Open the chart drive.
Chart drive
Display unit
2. Insert desired chart card groove side up.
3. Close the lid to protect the chart drive.
Note 1: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause the equipment to freeze.
Note 2: Do not insert or remove a card while the power is on. This may cause the equipment to freeze.
Note 3: For multiple display units, do not use the same chart card type in more than one display unit.
Note 4: A card remover is supplied to ease removal of chart cards. Attach the card remover to the right-hand side hole of the card and pull it to remove the card. You can leave the remover attached to the card while the card is in the chart drive. Push the remover leftward until it contacts the recessed area on the card.
Chart card and card remover
1-5
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off
RADAR PLOTTER
*
STATION NAME:
RADAR#
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
CHARTS AVAILABLE
LICENSE NO.
Press the [POWER/BRILL] key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and the equipment proceeds in the sequence shown below, displaying product information, startup test results and the chart usage disclaimer. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data for proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If NG appears an appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to press any key to go to the chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic test as shown in the paragraph “7.6 Diagnostics.”
Chart List
Host Name
è
* = "GD-1900C Plotter" for GD-1900C
#= Name determined at installation.
STARTUP TEST
ROM
RAM
BACKUP DATA
INTERNAL BATTERY
OK
OK
OK
OK
** = Program version no. for
FURUNO/NAVIONICS model. 19500010XX for C-MAP model.
XX = program version no.
è
NO NATIONAL HYDROGRAPHIC
OFFICE HAS VERIFIED THE
INFORMATION IN THIS
COASTLINE DATA CARD AND NONE
ACCEPT LIABILITY FOR THE
ACCURACY OF REPRODUCTION OR
ANY MODIFICATIONS MADE
THEREAFTER. THIS PRODUCT WITH
THIS COASTLINE DATA CARD
DOES NOT REPLACE THE
REQUIREMENT TO USE THE
APPROPRIATE PRODUCTS FOR
NAVIGATION ACCORDING TO
NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL
REGULATIONS.
PROGRAM No. 19500020XX**
Startup sequence
For start up with the radar display, the magnetron takes from one minute to two minutes and thirty seconds (depending or radar model) to warm up before the radar can be operated. The time remaining for warm up of the magnetron is counted down at the center of the display.
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used display, or wait several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the [POWER/BRILL] key until the screen goes dark (approx. 3 sec.). To protect the LCD attach the hard cover.
Note that the network sounder will be turned off approx. three minutes after turning off the power.
Note: The first time you turn on the power (or any time the power is applied after a memory reset), you are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides simulated operation of the equipment. Push the [ENTER] knob to start the simulation mode, or press the [CLEAR] key to start normal operation. For further details about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.10 Simulation Display.”
1-6
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.4 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Hue
You can adjust display brilliance, panel brilliance and hue as shown below.
1.4.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance
12/
3nm
LP
H-UP
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily. A set of soft keys for adjustment of brilliance and hue appear.
Active soft key is highlighted.
319. 9
°
M
BRILL
CONTST
DISPLY
BRILL
34
080
°
°
22. 3456'N 359.9
°
M BRILL
CONTST
16.0nm
DISPLY
BRILL
PANEL
BRILL
PANEL
BRILL
HUE HUE
RADAR
STBY
RADAR
STBY
WP-002 FISH
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
RETURN
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
8 RETURN
Radar Display Plotter Display
Brilliance adjustment soft keys
2. Press the DISPLY BRILL or PANEL BRILL soft key as appropriate. An adjustment window appears at the bottom of the screen. This window shows the name of the item selected for adjustment plus current brilliance level, by bar graph.
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
PANEL BRILLIANCE
8
Display brilliance Panel brilliance
Display brilliance and panel brilliance windows
3. Adjust the [ENTER] knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise to decrease it. You may also use the soft key pressed at step 2. Eight levels of display brilliance and panel brilliance are available.
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note 1: If the unit is turned off with minimum brilliance, the screen will be dark at the next power-up. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key consecutively to adjust the brilliance.
Note 2: This equipment does not have a contrast control.
1-7
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.4.2 Hue
You may select the colors for the radar, plotter and overlay displays as below.
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.
2. Press the HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.
HUE
▲
¡
¡
¡
¤
▼
DAY
NIGHT
TWILIGHT
MANUAL SET
Hue window
3. Operate the trackball to select hue desired, referring to the table below.
MANUAL SET follows the color settings on the CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu for the radar.
Characters Red Black
Radar ring
Radar echo
Red
Orange
Green*
Red
Green*
Yellow
Background Black White
* = Red on C-MAP display unit.
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the radar background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL SET” hue setting is used. In this case, set HUE to other position and then return to “MANUAL” to show the own ship track in black.
1-8
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5 Selecting a Display
If you have a radar, navigator, network sounder and external video source (video recorder, etc., optional PIP board required) six full-screen displays are available: radar, plotter, echo sounder, nav data, overlay, and external video. In addition to the full-screen display, you can divide the screen into halves and thirds to show two and three sets of images on a combination display.
Full screen Combination screen Overlay screen
(radar) (radar + plotter) (plotter + radar only,
Requires L/L data)
Display screens
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.
Screen type and available display screen
Full screen
Plotter, radar, sounder, nav data, external video, overlay
Combination screen options
(half- or thirds-screen)
Plotter, radar, sounder, compass, highway, compass/highway, nav data, overlay, external video
Overlay screen options
Radar + plotter
1-9
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.2 Selecting a display
1. Press the [DISP] key to show the display selection window. The icons of modes not available are marked with an “X.” HOTPAGE 1-HOTPAGE 6 are user-arrangeable displays called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you like. For further details, see the paragraph “5.6 Hot Page Setup.”
Selected item
RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER NAV DATA OVERLAY EXT VIDEO
Basic display screens
Hot pages
HOTPAGE 1 HOTPAGE 2 HOTPAGE 3 HOTPAGE 4 HOTPAGE 5 HOTPAGE 6
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE
AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.
Display screen selection window
2. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page screen.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob.
5. If you selected a basic display screen, a group of appropriate combination displays appear. In the example below, the radar combination screens are shown.
1-10
PUSH ENTER KNOB.
Radar combination screen selection window
6. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select display desired.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to finish.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens
A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens to switch control between displays. In the example below, the PLOTTR CNTRL and SNDR
CNTRL soft keys enable switching control between the plotter and sounder screens in the plotter/sounder combination display.
34
°
22. 3456’N 359.9
°
M TRIP NU
080 ° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
0’33"
40.0
0
50
100
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
150
PLOTTR
CNTRL
97
50k
WP-002 FISH
Plotter display selected
200
PLOTTR
CNTRL
To adjust sounder
SNDR
CNTRL
To adjust plotter
0’33" 34 ° 22. 3456’N 359.9
° M TRIP NU
080 ° 22. 3456’E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
0
SHIFT
40.0
50
MODE
97
50k
WP-002 FISH
Sounder display selected
200
100
150
FREQ
50 /200
DISPLAY
MODE
SNDR
CNTRL
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/sounder combination display
1-11
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.4 Selecting image source
When more than one network radar or network sounder is connected to the equipment, you may select an image source for each as shown below. This is not necessary when only one network radar or network sounder is connected.
1. Press the [DISP] key.
2. Press any soft key to show the following display.
SELECT
SOURCE
RADAR SOURCE RADAR - - -
SOUNDER SOURCE SOUNDER-
IP ADDRESS 172.031.003.003
HOST NAME RADAR - - -
EDIT
IF THERE IS MORE THAN
ONE NETWORK RADAR OR
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY
SELECT THE IMAGE
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.
RETURN
Select source menu
3. Use the trackball to select RADAR SOURCE or SOUNDER SOURCE as appropriate, then press the EDIT key.
RADAR SOURCE SOUNDER SOURCE
R ADAR - - - S OUNDER-
Radar source Sounder source
Radar source and sounder source windows
4. Use the trackball and alphanumeric keys to enter source name: Adjust the trackball to select location and enter character with the alphanumeric keys.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to set.
6. Press the [DISP] key to finish.
7. Turn the power off and on again.
Note: Source names are determined at installation. For example, the source names for radars in a two radar system might be “RADAR” and
“RADAR1”.
1-12
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
The trackball functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range and bearing to a location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter). Roll the trackball to shift the cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of trackball rotation.
Cursor
12/
3nm
LP
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
TARGET
ZOOM &
D. BOX
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Cursor Data
Bearing from own ship to cursor
Range from own ship to cursor
Radar Display
Cursor data
L/L position,
Range and bearing from own ship to cursor
+
34
°
22. 3456'N 272.4
°
M
TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456'E 15.9 nm 99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
CENTER
Cursor
WP-002 FISH
BRIDGE
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Plotter Display
Cursor, cursor data
1-13
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as
Destination
The MOB (Man Overboard) mark functions to mark man overboard position. You can inscribe this mark from any mode, except while playing back data or conducting any test. Note that this function requires position data.
1-14
MOB mark
M
(MOB)
Range, bearing
Man overboad
Current position
M
O
B
162.5
°
M
0.49 nm
MOB Data Box
Bearing and range to MOB position
MOB concept
1. Press and hold down the [SAVE/MOB] key for about three seconds when someone falls overboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved (youngest empty waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB confirmation window.
XXX = Waypoint number
WAYPOINT SAVED!
XXXWPT
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
After several seconds
MAN OVER BOARD!
GO TO MOB?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
MOB mark messages
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or press the [CLEAR] key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If you select the MOB position as destination;
•
A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay appears depending on the display in use.
•
The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a light-blue line runs between it and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB position.
•
Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its corresponding waypoint.
Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the
[CLEAR] key followed by pushing the [ENTER] knob to erase the waypoint. Then, repeat to erase the MOB mark.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display.
Up to six data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the default data boxes are position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground, speed over ground and trip log. The user may choose which data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In addition, data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (plotter, radar, sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see the paragraph “5.5 Data Boxes Setup.”
12/ 3nm
LP
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
Data boxes
TRIP LOG
177nm
POSITION
47
°
58.535'N
122
°
36.496'W
COG
323.6
°
M
SOG
20.0 kt
TARGET
ZOOM &
D. BOX
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Radar Display
34
°
22. 3456'N 359.9
°
M
TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
Data boxes
WP-002
TRIP LOG
FISH
177nm
POSITION
47
°
58.535'N
122
°
36.496'W
COG
323.6
°
M
SOG
20.0 kt
Plotter Display
D. BOX
ON /OFF
Data boxes
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key
Plotter: D. BOX ON/OFF
Radar: ZOOM & D. BOX
→
D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data
box also shown/hidden)
Sounder: AUTO/D. BOX
→
D. BOX ON/OFF
1-15
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
You may select the location for data boxes as follows:
1. Using the trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the cursor enters the box it changes to a hand. Push the [ENTER] knob, and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
2. Use the trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the
[ENTER] knob.
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box
If a data box is obscuring a desired object you may temporarily erase the box.
Use the trackball to place the cursor inside the data box you wish to erase, then press the [CLEAR] key. To redisplay the box, press the D. BOX soft key twice to display it.
1-16
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
The function keys provide for one-touch execution of a desired function. The default function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
Default Setting, Key Label
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
Heading line on/off, HL Track on/off, TRK
Rings on/off, RNG
Echo trail, TRL
Offcenter, SFT
Radar source, RSR
Edit mark/line, EML
Ruler, RUL
Add new waypoint,
ADD
Waypoint alphanumeric list, ALP
1.9.1 Executing a function
TLL output, TLL
Clutter, CLT
Signal level, SLV
Noise limiter, NL
Picture advance, PA
1. Press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to replace the preset soft key labels with the function key labels.
12/ 3nm
LP
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
H
L
R
S
R
S
F
T
T
R
L
R
N
G
Function keys
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Radar Display
34
°
22. 3456'N 359.9
°
M
TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9nm
16.0 nm
002WP
FISH
BRIDGE
R
U
L
E
M
L
T
R
K
A
L
P
A
D
D
Function keys
Plotter Display
Function keys
1-17
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
2. Press function key desired.
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the plotter, radar and sounder displays. For further details see the following:
Radar: paragraph 5.2.3
Plotter: paragraph 5.3.2
Sounder: paragraph 5.9.4
The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration purposes, provides simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many features your unit has to offer. It allows you to view and control a simulated plotter, radar and sounder picture, without position-fixing equipment, network radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative, thus you may practice setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a target, etc.
The simulation icon ( S
M
) appears when any simulation mode is active.
To start the simulation display;
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP and SIMULATION
SETUP soft keys in that order.
RADAR
PLOTTER
SOUNDER
SPEED
COURSE
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
START DATE & TIME
RADAR SIMULATION DATA NO
LIVE
LIVE
LIVE
00.0kt
000.0
°
45
°
35.000’N
125
°
00.000’W
00:00 01.APR.00
SIM
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
Simulation setup menu
3. Follow appropriate procedure on the next several pages.
1-18
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Radar
NavNet display unit-generated echoes
1. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
RADAR
▲
¡
¡
¤
▼
SIMULATION 1
SIMULATION 2
LIVE
2. Select SIMULATION 1, then push the [ENTER] knob.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
NavNet radar antenna-generated echoes (not available with the GD-1900C)
1. Select RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the EDIT soft key.
2. Select YES, then push the [ENTER] knob to erase simulation data and get new data. The message “Now getting demo data. Do not turn off display unit.” appears while the unit is receiving radar data.
Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found.
Cannot get demo data.” appears. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not active. Cannot get demo data.” is displayed.
Check that the radar is plugged in and its signal cable is firmly fastened.
3. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select SIMULATION 2, then push the [ENTER] knob.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Plotter
1. Select PLOTTER, then press the EDIT soft key.
PLOTTER
▲
¡
¤
▼
SIMULATION
LIVE
2. Select SIMULATION, then push the [ENTER] knob.
3. Select SPEED, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with the alphanumeric keys, then push the [ENTER] knob.
5. Select COURSE, then press the EDIT key.
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a figure-eight course, or enter your own course at DIRECTION. To enter course, use the trackball to select digit, and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
7. Press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select LATITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85 ° N-85 ° S, default setting, 45 ° 35.000’N), then push the [ENTER] knob.
10. Select LONGITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
1-19
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180 ° E-180 ° W, default setting, 125 ° 00.000’W), then push the [ENTER] knob.
12. Select START DATE & TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
13. Enter start date and time, then push the [ENTER] knob.
14. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Sounder
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOUNDER
▲
¡
¡
¤
▼
SIMULATION 1
SIMULATION 2
LIVE
2. Select SIMULATION 1 (internally generated echoes) or SIMULATION 2
(network sounder-generated echoes), then push the [ENTER] knob.
Note: The depth, shift, bottom-zoom, bottom-lock and bottom discrimination cannot be shown at SIMULATION 1 mode.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1-20
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Auto Plotter) function.
ARP requires a Model 1800/1900 series network radar equipped with the ARP circuit board.
North marker
(Head-up, Course-up mode)
Guard zone 2
Cursor
Range/ range ring interval
Presentation mode
Alarm icon
EBL1
Battery icon
Simulation mode
Guard zone 1
Range ring
Pulselength
12/ 3nm
LP
H-UP
S
M
Heading line
319. 9
°
M
Heading
M: Magnetic
T: True
TRAIL 30m
02m30s
G1 IN
G2 OUT
ES 2
EAV L
IR L
VRM1
Zoom area
EBL1 bearing
VRM1 range
EBL1
27.0
°
R
VRM1
5.666nm
EBL2
327.1
°
R
VRM2
8.212nm
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Trail time
Trail elapsed time
Guard zone 1
Guard zone 2
Echo stretch
Echo averaging
Interference rejector
VRM2
EBL2
Own ship vector
(ARP-equipped model, true vector mode)
Zoom window
Cursor range and bearing
(Cursor position may also be shown, in
L/L or Loran C TD.)
Radar display
2-1
2. RADAR OPERATION
1. Confirm that the network radar is plugged in.
2. Press the [DISP] key to select a radar display.
3. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.
4. Press the RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.
5. Press the RETURN soft key.
When the radar picture is not required, but you want keep it in a state of readiness, press the RADAR TX soft key to highlight STBY on its label.
2.3 Tuning
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default tuning method is automatic. If you require manual tuning, do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select TUNING, then press the EDIT soft key.
TUNING
¤
¡
AUTO
MAN Tuning bar
Tuning window
4. Choose MAN.
5. Adjust the [ENTER] knob until the tuning bar is at its longest position.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, ask your dealer how to re-adjust tuning.
The [GAIN] key adjusts the gain sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner similar to that of volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received signals.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen.
If your gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand, excessive gain yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display.
To adjust the receiver sensitivity, transmit on long range, and then do the following:
2-2
12/
H-UP
2. RADAR OPERATION
1. Press the [GAIN] key to show the “gain adjustment” soft keys, and the last-used adjustment window appears. The example below shows the gain sensitivity adjustment window. The gain soft keys shown depend on radar source as shown below.
319. 9
°
M
GAIN
ADJUST
GAIN
12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
GAIN
ADJUST
GAIN
GAIN SENSITIVITY
¤ AUTO ROUGH
¡
¡
¡
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN 0
A/C
SEA
A/C
RAIN
FTC
RETURN
GAIN SENSITIVITY
¤ AUTO ROUGH
¡
¡
¡
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN 0
A/C
SEA
A/C
RAIN
A/C AT
ON /OFF
RETURN
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Model 1700 series Model 1800/1900 series
Gain adjustment soft keys
2. Press the GAIN soft key to show the gain sensitivity setting window.
GAIN SENSITIVITY
¤ AUTO ROUGH
¡ AUTO MODERATE
¡ AUTO CALM
¡ MAN 0
Gain sensitivity window
3. Use the trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust, while observing the radar echo. The range of adjustment is 0-100.
5. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or the RETURN soft key to finish.
Adjusting the FTC (When the radar source is the 1700 series radar)
To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the
FTC.
In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to clarify the picture when navigating in confined waters. However, with the circuit active the receiver is less sensitive. Therefore, turn off the FTC, by setting it for “0”, when its function is not required.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the FTC soft key to show the FTC window.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100(%). Do not overadjust the FTC – weak target echoes may be missed.
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2-3
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display with random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher the antenna above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter may affect radar performance because real targets are sometimes hidden by the echoes of small waves. (See the left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C SEA to reduce the clutter.
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases, so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.
2-4
Sea clutter at screen center
A/C SEA adjusted; sea clutter suppressed
Effect of A/C SEA
A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.
A/C SEA
¡ AUTO ROUGH
¡ AUTO MODERATE
¡ AUTO CALM
¤ MAN
0
A/C SEA
0
Model 1700 series radar Model 1800/1900 series radar
A/C SEA setting window
3. When the radar source is the Model 1700 series, use the trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100. Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
2. RADAR OPERATION
5. When the radar source is the Model 1800/1900 series, A/C SEA and A/C
RAIN can be automatically adjusted. Press the A/C AT ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate. When turned on, it overrides A/C SEA and
A/C RAIN settings.
6. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter
The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect precipitation clutter (rain, snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets.
Precipitation clutter shows as random dots on the screen.
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.
A/C RAIN
0
A/C RAIN setting window
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust the A/C RAIN. The current level is shown on the A/C RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2-5
2. RADAR OPERATION
Range
Ring Interval
No. of Rings
The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will appear on your display. In addition, the range setting will also automatically adjust the range ring interval so that accurate range measurements may be made while operating on any range setting.
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner of the display.
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.
Range scales (nm, sm)
Range 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72
Ring
Interval 0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5
1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
No. of
Rings
2 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4
Range scales (km)
0.25 0.5
0.75 1 1.5
2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72
0.125 0.25 0.25 0.25
0.5
0.5
1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
2 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.
Model 1722/1722C/1823C: 24 nm
Model 1732/1732C/1742/1742C/1833/1833C: 36 nm
Model 1762/1762C/1933/1933C: 48 nm
Model 1943/1943C: 64 nm
Model 1953C: 72 nm
Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu. For details see paragraph 5.2.2. This function is not available with the GD-1900C.
2-6
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.8 Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display.
Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you are not usually required to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength setting, however, it is possible to change it for the ranges shown below. Generally, select a longer pulse for longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse
3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Medium pulse, long pulse
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
SIGNAL
PROCESS
I. REJ
OFF
E. AVG
OFF
PULSE
E. STR
OFF
RETURN
Shown when radar source is the Model
1800/1900 series radar. Not shown otherwise.
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Signal process soft keys
3. Choose the 1.5 nm or 3 nm with the RANGE key.
4. Press the PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or
MEDIUM for 1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm,
6 km.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2-7
2. RADAR OPERATION
This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up and true motion.
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up.
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M RADAR
DISPLAY
MODE
HD UP
SHIFT
RINGS
HIGH
HL
OFF
RETURN
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Radar display soft keys
3. Press the MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation mode and the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up,
True Motion, Head-up, and Course-up.
Function Indicator on display Soft key label
North-up N-UP
True Motion TR-M TRUE M
Head-up H-UP
Course-up C-UP
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to head-up, the heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-
°
” and the audio alarm sounds. Press the [ALARM] key to acknowledge the alarm.
The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears. Restore compass signal to show heading indication. Use the MODE soft key to select presentation mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the
[CLEAR] key.
2-8
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes
Head-up
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line connecting the center with the top of the display indicates own ship’s heading. Targets are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship’s heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.
Heading Line
North Marker
Head-up presentation mode
Course-up
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the currently selected course at the top of the screen. As you change heading, the ship’s heading line moves. If you select a new course, the picture resets to display the new course at the top of the display.
Targets are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to the intended course which is maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading line moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course changes.
North Marker Heading Line
Course-up presentation mode
2-9
2. RADAR OPERATION
North-up
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their measured distances and in their true (compass) directions from own ship. North is maintained at the top of the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to ship’s heading.
North
Heading Line
North-up presentation mode
True motion
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the screen, while your own ship moves across the radar image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses. As your ship’s position approaches the edge of the screen, the radar display is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of your ship. You can manually reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing the RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the SHIFT soft key.
North
Heading Line
2-10
True motion presentation mode
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10 Measuring the Range
You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by the cursor, and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings
Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target.
Check the range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring.
To turn the range rings on, do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M RADAR
DISPLAY
MODE
HD UP
SHIFT
RINGS
HIGH
HL
OFF
RETURN
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Radar display soft keys
3. Press the RINGS soft key to turn the rings on and select desired brilliance.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2-11
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor
Operate the trackball to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the radar target. The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right of “+” at the bottom of the display.
Cursor
3nm 12/
H-UP
Target
319. 9
°
M
SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
TARGET
ZOOM &
D. BOX
+
11.2 ˚R
11.70
nm
Range and bearing from own ship to cursor
How to measure range to a target with the cursor
2-12
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
EBL/VRM soft keys
2. Press the VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft key to select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is highlighted.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob the place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar target. Read the VRM indication to find range to the target.
VRM2
(Dashed line)
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
VRM1
(Dotted line)
VRM1 range
EBL1
---.-
°
R
VRM1
3.123nm
EBL2
---.-
°
R
VRM2
9.343nm
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Active VRM is highlighted.
VRM2 range
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.
How to measure range with the VRM
2-13
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10.4 Erasing a VRM, VRM indication
Press appropriate VRM soft key, then press the [CLEAR] key. The VRM is erased and its indication becomes blank.
2.10.5 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.
2.10.6 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the
EBL/VRM data boxes.
2.10.7 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you want to see, you can move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob, and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
3. Use the trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the
[ENTER] knob.
2.11 Measuring the Bearing
There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the
EBL (Electronic bearing Line).
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the center of the target. The bearing to the target appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner on the screen.
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key.
2. Press the EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key to select the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is highlighted.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the
EBL indication to find the bearing to the target.
2-14
EBL1
(Dotted line)
12/ 3nm
LP
H-UP
EBL2
(Dashed line)
EBL2 bearing
EBL1 bearing
EBL1
330.1
°
R
VRM1
-.---nm
EBL2
234.1˚R
VRM2
-.---nm
2. RADAR OPERATION
319. 9
°
M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Active marker is highlighted.
How to measure bearing with the EBL
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.
Note: The bearing to a target may be shown relative to own ship’s heading
(Relative) or True bearing (requires heading data). This may be done with
“EBL REFERENCE,” which is in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.
2.11.3 Erasing an EBL, EBL indication
Press appropriate EBL soft key, then press the [CLEAR] key. The EBL is erased and its indication becomes blank.
2.11.4 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.
2.11.5 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the
EBL/VRM data boxes.
2.11.6 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you want to see, you can move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob, and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
3. Use the trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the
[ENTER] knob.
2-15
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker
The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. It is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up mode; it changes its orientation in the north-up, course-up and true motion modes with ship’s movement.
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up modes the north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading moves.
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the RADAR
DISPLY soft key followed by the HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay the markers. (If the radar soft keys are not shown, hit the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display them.)
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference
Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select NOISE REJECTION, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF, LOW or HIGH as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-16
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference
Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is operating in the same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance looks like many bright dots either scattered at random or in the form of dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the display. Interference effects are distinguishable from normal echoes because they do not appear in the same place on successive rotations of the scanner.
Be sure to turn off the interference rejector when no interference exists – weak targets may be missed.
Radar interference
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
SIGNAL
PROCESS
I. REJ
OFF
E. AVG
OFF
PULSE
E. STR
OFF
RETURN
Shown when radar source is the Model
1800/1900 series radar. Not shown otherwise.
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
SIGNAL PROCESS soft keys
3. Press the I. REJ soft key successively to choose the interference rejection level desired; LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the interference rejector is on.
2-17
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.15 Zoom
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the
“zoom circle.” It is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and when the display is shifted.
2.15.1 Zooming in on radar targets
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Use the trackball to set the cursor where you want to zoom.
3. Press the ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
4. Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A solid circle, called the
“zoom circle,” appears on the display.
5. To release the cursor, press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The solid circle changes to a dashed one.) To relocate the zoom circle, select location with the trackball, then press the CURSOR LOCK key.
6. To quit the zoom function, press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.
Zoom circle
12/
HU
3nm
LP 319. 9
°
M
ZOOM &
D. BOX
ZOOM
ON /OFF
CURSOR
FLOAT
ARP
TGT ZM
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
RETURN
Requires optional
ARP Board in
Model 1800/1900 series network radar.
Not shown otherwise.
+
359.9 ˚R
5.727
nm
Zoom window
Zoom
2.15.2 Zooming in on ARP, TTM targets
You may zoom in on TTM (Tracked Target Message) and ARP targets. TTM targets can come from a NavNet connected radar, or from other ARP radar that is outputting the TTM message. (TTM is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP capable radar.) Target numbers must be turned on to use this function. This can be done by enabling the target ID number option in the ARP SETUP menu.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the ZOOM/D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
3. Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ZOOM ON.
2-18
2. RADAR OPERATION
4. Press the ARP TGT ZM soft key.
SELECT TARGET NO.
▲
1
▼
Target no. selection window
5. Use the [ENTER] knob to select number (1-10), then push the [ENTER] knob.
If the target number does not exist several beeps sound and the zoom function is cancelled.
.
To cancel, press the CURSOR LOCK soft key.
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background color for the radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see, change the background color.
2.16 Shifting the Picture
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced manually or automatically to expand the view field without switching to a larger scale.
The sweep origin can be shifted in any presentation mode to a point specified by the cursor by up to 50% of the range in use in any direction.
1. Locate the cursor anywhere within the effective radius of the display.
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
4. Press the SHIFT soft key.
5. Press the MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor location. SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.
6. To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.
SHIFT
Cursor
Place cursor where desired.
Press the MANUAL soft key.
Shifting the picture manually
2-19
2. RADAR OPERATION
The amount of automatic shift is calculated according to ship’s speed, and the amount of shift is limited to 50% of the range in use. For example, if you set the shift speed setting for 15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots the amount of shift will be about 34%. The formula for determining shift amount is as shown below.
Ship's speed
X 0.5 = Amount of shift(%)
Shift speed setting
Automatic shift mode is only available in the head-up mode.
Setting automatic shift maximum speed
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3. Press the SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.
4. Press the AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto ship speed setting window.
AUTO SHIP SPEED
15
Auto ship speed setting window
5. Adjust the trackball or [ENTER] knob to set the maximum speed of your vessel, and then push the [ENTER] knob or the ENTER soft key to set. The setting range is 1-999 kt and the default setting is 15 kt.
Automatic shift
Press the AUTO key to automatically shift the sweep origin. To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.
2-20
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.17 Using the Offset EBL
The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course. It can also be used to measure the range and bearing between two targets.
2.17.1 Predicting collision course
The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a potential collision course with your vessel.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
3. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is marked with an “X.”
4. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it might be on a collision course with own ship.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to fix the origin position.
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the [ENTER] knob so the EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks along the EBL towards the center of the display (your ship’s position), the target may be on a collision course with your vessel.
7. To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.
Target tracked here
Initial target position
12/
3nm
LP
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL1
45.0˚R
VRM1
-.---nm
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL
2-21
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets
The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing between two targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an example.
1. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the target “A.”
2. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
3. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
4. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is marked with an “X.”
5. Rotate the [ENTER] knob so the EBL bisects the target “B.”
6. Push the [ENTER] knob, then press the VRM1 ON soft key.
7. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to place the VRM1 on the inner edge of the target
“B.”
8. Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing between the two targets.
9. To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET key.
Target B
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
Target A
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
Bearing and range between target A and target B
EBL1
45.0
°
R
VRM1
7.121nm
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Measuring range and bearing between two targets
2-22
2. RADAR OPERATION
Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their movements relative or true to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past possible collision situations.
Echo trail
Sample echo trails
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Press the TRAIL soft key.
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9 ° M TRAIL
TRAIL
ON /OFF
TRAIL
TIME
GRAD
SINGLE
TRAIL
COLOR
RETURN
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Trail soft keys
4. Press the TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.
TRAIL TIME
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
15 seconds
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
CONTINUOUS
Trail time window
5. Use the trackball to select time desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2-23
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.18.2 Starting echo trails
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Press the TRAIL soft key.
4. Press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select ON.
5. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top right-hand corner of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets.
Trails are restarted when the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is turned on.
For continuous trails, the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59 seconds. When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time display resets to zero and trails begin again.
To turn off echo trail, press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 4 in the above procedure.
The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation paints the trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] soft key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
Multitone Monotone
Multitone and monotone trails
2-24
2. RADAR OPERATION
Trails may be shown target trails in blue, yellow, green or white.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET, TRAIL and TRAIL COLOR soft keys in that order.
TRAIL COLOR
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE
Trail color window
3. Use the trackball to select the color desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
2.18.5 Echo trail mode
Echo trails can be shown in Relative or True motion. (True trails require heading and speed inputs.)
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP key.
3. Choose TRAIL MODE, then press the EDIT soft key.
TRAIL MODE
▲
¡
¤
▼
TRUE
RELATIVE
Trail mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-25
2. RADAR OPERATION
Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as weaker and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s internal circuitry. The echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all ranges. Two types of echo stretch are available: ES LOW which stretches echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which stretches them in both range and bearing directions.
Target
Bearing direction
Bearing direction
Range direction
Echo Stretch OFF "LOW" Echo stretch "HIGH" Echo stretch
Types of echo stretch
This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar interference. For this reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are properly suppressed before activating the echo stretch.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.
2-26
2. RADAR OPERATION
The echo average feature, which requires a Model 1800/1900 series network radar, effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position during every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs scan-to-scan correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress sea clutter with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.
LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance of unstable echoes.
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows EAV L, EAV M or EAV H when echo averaging is on.
(a) Echo average OFF (b) Echo average ON
Effect of echo averaging
2-27
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.21 Outputting TLL Data
Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their plotter screen with the TTL mark ( X ). This function requires position and heading data.
1. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the target whose position you wish to output.
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the TARGET soft key.
3nm 12/
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
Requires ARP circuit board in Model 1800/1900 series
NavNet radar. Not shown otherwise.
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
TARGET soft keys
4. Press the TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data. The TTL mark appears on the plotter screen at the target’s position the moment the TLL
OUTPUT soft key was pressed. Further, that position is recorded as a waypoint on all NavNet units, under the youngest empty waypoint number on each NavNet unit.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when receiving TLL from another NavNet display unit. Press any key to restore normal operation.
2-28
2. RADAR OPERATION
The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a guard zone. When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an audio alarm sounds and the offending target blinks to call the operator’s attention.
CAUTION
•
The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
•
A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone
To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:
1. Press the [ALARM] key.
2. Use the trackball to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner) of the guard zone you want to set, then press the SET GUARD1 or SET
GUARD2 soft key, depending on which guard zone you want to set.
3. Use the trackball to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left corner) of the guard zone area, then push the [ENTER] knob.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
12/
3nm
LP
H-UP
319. 9
°
M
ALARM
12/
3nm
LP
H-UP
1
SET
GUARD1
SET
GUARD2
319. 9
°
M
2
ALARM
GUARD 1
SET
GUARD1
ERASE
GUARD1
SET
GUARD2
RETURN RETURN
MOVE +CURSOR TO
ANOTHER CORNER OF
GUARD1 AND PUSH
KNOB TO SET.
+
317.2 ˚R
11.60
nm
NO ALARM
+
39.9 ˚R
8.800
nm
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner for guard zone and press the SET
GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key.
(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top) corner for guard zone and press the [ENTER] knob.
How to set a guard alarm zone
2-29
2. RADAR OPERATION
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine guard alarm type. If a target is found inside the guard zone, the guard zone type becomes an “Outward guard alarm,” and any target exiting the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. If no target is found, the guard zone type becomes an
“Inward guard alarm,” and any targets entering the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or G1(G2) OUT.
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range, the audio alarm sounds and the alarm icon appears (in red). Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the alarm. Press the [ALARM] key and the message
“GUARD1(2) IS OUTSIDE RADAR RANGE” appears. Reselect appropriate range.
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the guard alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the radar is set to transmit again.
Note 3: If the network radar is set to standby while the radar picture is not displayed, the alarm icon appears in red and the alarm sounds. Press the [ALARM] key and the message “STBY MODE HAS BEEN
SELECTED. GUARD/WTCHMN CANCELED.” or
“GUARD/WATCHMAN CANCELED. STBY/TX SELECTED.” appears.
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…
Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and the alarm icon appears in red. Additionally the message “TARGET ENTERED
INTO GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the alarm.
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Press the ERASE GUARD1 or ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
3. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2-30
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.23 Watchman
2.23.1 How watchman works
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to check for targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is cancelled, the audio alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no target is found the radar goes into standby for the number of minutes specified on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This feature is useful when you do not need the radar’s function continuously but want to be alerted to radar targets in a specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when Watchman is active.
Tx ST-BY
*
Tx ST-BY
*
1 min
Watchman starts
5,10 or
20 min
1 min
5,10 or
20 min
* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.
How watchman works
1. Set a guard zone. (See the paragraph 2.22.)
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
4. Press the W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the message “PLEASE SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO
CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then set a guard zone.
2 .
23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval
The watchman standby interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar is in standby, can be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select WATCHMAN TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
WATCHMAN TIME
¤
¡
¡
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
Watchman window
4. Select time desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-31
2. RADAR OPERATION
In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false echoes (second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.
Tx repetition
Second-trace echo
False echo range
Actual range
Second-trace echoes
To activate or deactivate the second-trace echo rejector do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Use the trackball to select 2ND ECHO REJECTION, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Choose ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-32
2. RADAR OPERATION
A waypoint marker, showing the location of the destination waypoint set on the plotter, may be inscribed on the radar display.
12/
HU
L 3nm
SP
Waypoint marker
319. 9
°
M
NAV
FUNC
W. MAN
ON/ OFF
WPT MK
ON /OFF
RETURN
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
Waypoint marker
1. If not already shown, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
3. Press the WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2-33
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26 ARP, TTM Operation
When the radar source is an ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series network radar, you can manually and automatically acquire and track ten targets. Once a target is acquired automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 32 nm. If the FURUNO heading sensor PG-1000 is used, the data sentence
“RMC” is necessary.
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data sentence TTM (Tracked Target Message) via the NETWORK or NMEA port on the display unit. However, targets cannot be acquired.
Note: When using your unit as remote display, you cannot change the range of the main radar at the remote display. For the target acquisition, set the range individually.
Usage precautions for ARP
WARNING
No one navigational aid should be relied upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to check all aids available to confirm position. Electronic aids are not a substitute for basic navigational principles and common sense.
•
This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since
the data generated by the auto plotter
are based on what radar targets are
selected, the radar must always be
optimally tuned for use with the auto
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea
returns and noise will not be acquired
and tracked.
•
A target does not always mean a land-
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
CAUTION
The plotting accuracy and response of this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the following:
•
Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual
amount depends on gyrocompass
specifications.)
•
The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15-30
seconds for high relative speed; 30-60
seconds for low relative speed.
Display accuracy is affected by the following:
•
Echo intensity
•
Radar transmission pulsewidth
•
Radar bearing error
•
Gyrocompass error
•
Course change (own ship or target)
2-34
2. RADAR OPERATION
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP
SETUP menu.
ARP
SETUP ARP TARGET INFO INTERNAL ARP
CANCEL ALL TARGETS NO
ARP VECTOR MODE
ARP VECTOR TIME
TRUE
30 minutes
HISTORY INTERVAL
CPA
OFF
OFF
TCPA 30 seconds
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA OFF
TARGET ID NUMBER OFF
EDIT
RETURN
ARP setup menu
2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP target info window.
ARP TARGET INFO
▲
¤
¡
¡
▼
INTERNAL ARP
EXTERNAL ARP
OFF
ARP target info window
3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.
INTERNAL ARP: The radar source must be an ARP-equipped Model
1800/1900 series NavNet radar. Select this item also for a NavNet unit being fed ARP targets.
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NMEA or NETWORK port.
Target tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-35
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)
Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you attempt to acquire an 11th target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY
TRACKING 10 TARGETS!” appears for five seconds. To acquire another target, terminate tracking of an unnecessary target as shown in the paragraph “2.26.4
Terminating tracking of ARP targets.”
Manual acquisition
1. If not already shown, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire.
4. Press the ACQ soft key.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The plot symbol changes over time as below. A vector appears about one minute after acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.
Vector
01*
At acquisition
01*
1 min. after acquisition
01*
3 min. after acquisition
* = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is
turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.
Target Number
ARP plot symbols
Automatic acquisition
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets automatically by setting an automatic acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is selected after acquiring targets manually, only the remaining capacity for targets may be automatically acquired.
For example, if seven targets have been manually acquired, three targets may be automatically acquired.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.
3. Operate the trackball to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.
AUTO ACQ. AREA
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON
OFF
Automatic acquisition area window
5. Select ON, then press the ENTER soft key.
2-36
2. RADAR OPERATION
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5 miles in range and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously tracked when switching to manual acquisition.
Automatic acquisition area
45
°
port
2.0 - 2.5 nm
45
°
starboard
Automatic acquisition area
2.26.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)
Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.
ARP
Target
Number
12/
3nm
LP
H-UP
01
ARP target number
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key.
3. Select TARGET ID NUMBER.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as appropriate.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
319. 9
° T
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
2-37
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets
When ten targets have been acquired, no more acquisition occurs unless targets are cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first cancel one or more individual targets, or all targets, using one of the procedures below.
Terminating tracking of selected targets
1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to terminate tracking and erase the target.
Terminating tracking of all targets
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
3. Press the EDIT soft key.
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
▲
¡
¤
▼
YES
NO
Cancel all targets window
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-38
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)
What is a vector?
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and course of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.
Vector
Vector
Vector reference, vector time
You may reference the vectors to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s heading (relative) as desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1,
3, 6, 15 or 30 minutes.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP
SETUP menu.
2. Operate the trackball to select ARP VECTOR MODE.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector mode window.
ARP VECTOR MODE
¤
¡
RELATIVE
TRUE
ARP vector mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector time window.
ARP VECTOR TIME
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
ARP vector time window
7. Operate the trackball to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min,
15 min and 30 min.
8. Press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-39
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.6 Displaying past position (ARP)
This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots. Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running
straight
(c) Ship reduced
speed
(d) Ship increased
speed
Past position displays
To turn the past position display on or off:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the trackball to select HISTORY INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the history interval window.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
OFF
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
History interval window
4. Operate the trackball to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min, or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-40
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.7 ARP, TTM target data
You can show motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) for
ARP or TTM targets. Note that TARGET ID NUMBER, in the ARP SETUP menu, must be turned on to display this data.
1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.
2. If not already displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the TARGET and TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected target appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM data box is displayed the ARP (TTM) data box will be under it.)
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
5. To erase ARP/TTM target data, select the corresponding target with the cursor, then press the [CLEAR] key.
Cursor
ARP
Target
3nm 12/
H-UP
01
319. 9
°
T
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min
CSE 359.9˚T SPD 12.5kt
CPA 2.21nm TCPA 12:35
+
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
CPA and TCPA
Course and Speed
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time
ARP target data
2-41
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds and the speaker icon appears (in red). In addition, the target plot symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and flashes together with its vector.
You may silence the audio alarm with the [CLEAR] key. Press the [ALARM] key and the message “COLLISION ALARM” appears. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship. However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be relied upon as the sole means for detecting the risk of collision. The navigator is not relieved of the responsibility to keep visual lookout for avoiding collisions, whether or not the radar or other plotting aid is in use.
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the trackball to select CPA.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
CPA
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
OFF
0.5nm
1nm
2nm
3nm
5nm
6nm
CPA window
4. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3 nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the trackball.
5. Press the ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu reappears.
6. Operate the trackball to select TCPA.
7. Press the EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
2-42
2. RADAR OPERATION
TCPA
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
30 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
6 minutes
12 minutes
TCPA window
8. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min and
12 min.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2.26.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)
When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol becomes a diamond and tracking is discontinued after one minute.
Canceling a lost target
1. Place the cursor on the target.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key.
01
Lost target mark
2-43
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.27 Interpreting the Radar Display
2.27.1 General
Minimum and maximum ranges
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of
1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m 2 is still shown separate from the point representing the antenna position. It is mainly dependent on the pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing such as main bang suppression and digital quantization. It is best to use the shortest possible range as long as the clarity and definition of the picture remain good.
Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of the target, and atmospheric conditions.
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. Rmax is given in the following equation.
R max
= 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 ) where Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)
h1: antenna height (m)
h2: target height (m)
Radar horizon
Optical horizon
Radar horizon
For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;
R max
= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm
It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs the radar signal).
2-44
2. RADAR OPERATION
Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution and range resolution.
Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display the echoes received from two targets, which are at the same range and close together, as separate targets.
Bearing resolution is directly proportional to the antenna length, and inversely proportional to the radar's wavelength.
Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display the echoes received from two targets, which are on the same bearing and close to each other, as separate targets.
Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually taken relative to the ship’s heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading marker at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, select a range which will put the target as far out to the edge of the radar screen as possible.
Range measurement
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the radar. There are three means of measuring range: the fixed range rings, the trackball and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range to a target. The trackball is rolled to place the cursor on the leading edge of the target. Range and bearing to the target is shown at the bottom right-hand corner of the display. The variable range marker’s diameter is increased or decreased so that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the operator to obtain more accurate range measurements.
2-45
2. RADAR OPERATION
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be recognized, however, if you understand why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the [A/C SEA] control.
True echo
Target
Own ship
Multiple echo
Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the beam. This stray RF is called a “sidelobe.” If a target exists where it can be detected by the sidelobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Sidelobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
Target A
Target B
(Spurious) Target B
(True)
Sidelobe echoes
2-46
2. RADAR OPERATION
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may show at two positions on the screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen.
Target ship
Own ship
;; ;;
True echo
Mirror image of target ship
False echo
Virtual image
Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced. Within this sector, targets can not be detected.
Radar antenna
Radar mast
Shadow sector
Shadow sectors
2-47
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.27.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4
µ s) through the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5
µ s) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver.
If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
Screen A: When SART
is distant
Echo from SART
24 NM
Screen B: When SART
is close
Lines of 12 dots are displayed in concentric arcs.
Radar antenna beamwidth
1.5 NM
Echo from
SART
Position of
SART
Own ship position
9500 MHz
9200 MHz
SART mark length
7.5
µ s
Sweep time
95
µ s
Own ship position
Radar receiver bandwidth
Position of
SART
Sweep start
Low speed sweep signal
High speed sweep signal
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display
2-48
2. RADAR OPERATION
General procedure for detecting SART response
1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART responses is about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
General remarks on receiving SART
SART range errors
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the
SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is displayed may be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART.
When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.
Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used with long pulses on long range and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges.
Any radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART.
Radar sidelobes
As the SART is approached, sidelobes from the radar antenna may show the
SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use of the [A/C SEA] control although it may be operationally useful to observe the sidelobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will confirm that the SART is near to the ship.
Gain
For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range detection should be used, that is, with background noise speckle visible.
2-49
2. RADAR OPERATION
A/C SEA control
For optimum range SART detection, this control should be set to the minimum.
Care should be exercised as wanted target in sea clutter may be obscured. Note also that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be detectable, irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case, the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring 9.5 nm from the furthest dot back towards own ship.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities in which case the operator should switch to manual.
A/C RAIN control
This should be used normally (to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a
SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the anti-clutter rain circuitry. Note that racon responses, which are often in the form of a long flash, will be affected by the use of this control.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities in which case the operator should switch to manual.
Note: This SART information is excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 Operation of
Marine Radar for SART Detection.
2.27.4 Racon (Radar Beacon)
A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered by a ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted on the same frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is superimposed on the ship's radar display automatically.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just beyond the position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure below) displayed radially from just beyond the beacon.
Racon
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display
2-50
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen with the radar display, or in a combination screen.
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display
Icon (from left)
North Marker
Chart
Alarm
Track Hold
Chart Offset
Save
L/L Offset
Battery
Simulation
(See icon table on page A-12 for details.)
Scale
Nav data window
(Data changes with NAV soft key setting and cursor status. For details see next page.)
34
°
22. 3456'N 359.9
°
M
TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
002WPT
FISH
BRIDGE
NAV
POS
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Waypoint name
Waypoint marker
Course bar
Own ship marker
Track
Soft keys
Full-screen plotter display
Note: When GPS signal error is found, the following occurs depending on the device feeding position data:
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B: Alarm icon ( ) appears and the aural alarm sounds. Own ship marker blinks faster.
Other navigator: The message “NO GPS FIX” appears and is accompanied by the aural alarm and alarm icon. If the GPS signal is missing for more than 90 seconds, the message “NO POSITION DATA” appears.
3-1
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Nav data window
The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the NAV soft key and the cursor.
Presentation
Mode
Latitude and longitude of cursor intersection
Latitude, Longitude Bearing to Cursor
+ 34
124
°
°
24. 3456'N 359. 9
24. 3456'W
°
M TRIP
NU
59.9nm 99. 9nm
Cursor Mark Trip Distance
Range to
Cursor
Waypoint data
(waypoint selected with cursor)
Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint Course
001WPT
359. 9
°
M
359. 9
°
M TRIP NU
19. 9nm 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
Presentation
Mode
Waypoint Mark Range to Waypoint Speed Trip Distance
Own ship position
NAV
POS soft key
Latitude, Longitude Course
34
124
°
°
24. 3456'N 359. 9
24. 3456'W
°
M TRIP
NU
19. 9kt 99. 9nm
Presentation
Mode
Own Ship Mark Speed Trip Distance
Destination waypoint data
NAV
WPT soft key
Time-to-Go to Destination
Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint
001WPT
359. 9
°
M TTG
4D02H23M NU
19. 9nm
ETA
1st 13:45
Presentation
Mode
Waypoint Mark
Range to Waypoint
Estimated Time of
Arrival
Own ship speed and course
NAV
S/C soft key
Presentation
Mode
Course, Speed Bearing to Waypoint
359. 9
SOG
°
M BRG
RNG
359. 9
°
M TMP
DPT
79. 9
°
19. 9kt 99. 9nm 345 ft
F NU
Range to
Waypoint
Water Temp.*,
Depth*
* Requires appropriate
sensor.
Turns off nav data window
NAV
OFF soft key
Contents of nav data window
3-2
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
The compass display, shown in combination displays, provides steering information. The compass rose shows two triangles: the red triangle shows own ship’s course and the black triangle, which moves with ship’s course, shows the bearing to destination waypoint.
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors, show the latest 10 minutes of water temperature and depth data. The range of the depth graph is 50 feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth.
Destination waypoint
Speed over ground
Range to destination waypoint
Speed through water
Time-to-go to destination
Destination waypoint bearing
(black)
TTG
003WPT
0D 9H 59M
RNG 9 9 . 9 n m
SOG 10.0
kt
STW 10.0 kt
ETA 23th23:59
DPT
4 5 . 2 f t
0
BRG
3 5 9 . 9
°
M
N
20
TMP
1 6 . 2
°
F w
E
Estimated time of arrival at destination
Ship's course
(red)
Depth graph*
50
* = Requires appropriate sensor.
Shown (in red on color model) when direction to steer is "left."
Bearing scale
CSE
3 5 9 . 9
°
M 10
Direction to steer
(green)
Water temperature graph*
Own ship marker
(Black when within
XTE range, yellow when over.)
XTE monitor
(See next page for description.)
Compass display
3-3
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor
The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the distance you are off course and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker moves according to direction and distance off course. It is shown in black when the amount of cross-track error is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when it is over. An arrow appears at the right or left side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended course. It is shown in red when you should steer left, and green when you should steer right. In the example on the previous page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the compass display by pressing the
[HIDE/SHOW] key.
COMPSS CNTRL:
On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch control to the compass display by pressing the CNTRL soft key to select
COMPSS.
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below for how to set.
RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set. Press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. The following message is displayed.
RESTART NAVGATION TO
CURRENT WPT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Setting the range for the XTE monitor
1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key to display the following window.
XTE LIMIT
0 . 1 n m
XTE range setting window
2. Use the trackball to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be cleared by pressing the [CLEAR] key.
3. Enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to set, or press the CANCEL soft key to cancel.
3-4
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
The highway display, shown in combination displays, provides a graphic presentation of ship’s track along intended course. It is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a waypoint. The own ship marker shows the relation between ship and intended course. The XTE monitor shows the direction and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows the direction to steer to return to your course and the numeric the distance you are off course. Using the figure below as an example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return to course.
To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays aligned with the intended course line.
Destination waypoint
Range to destination waypoint
Time-to-go to destination
TTG
RNG 99.9 nm
WPT001
0D 9H 59M
SOG 10.0
kt
ETA
STW 10.0 kt
23th23:59
WPT001
Speed over ground, speed through water
Estimated time of arrival at destination
Destination waypoint
Intended course
Own ship marker
0.9 nm 0.009nm
0.9 nm
XTE range
Shown (in red) when direction to steer is "left."
Direction to steer
(green)
XTE monitor
Highway display
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the highway display by pressing the
[HIDE/SHOW] key.
HIWAY CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch control to the highway display by pressing the CNTRL soft key to show
HIWAY.
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on the previous page for how to set.
RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set. Press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. See the previous page for details.
3-5
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1.4 Nav data display
The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data, and it is shown in a three-screen combination display. The user may select what data to display and where to display it. For details see the paragraph “5.8 Nav Data Display
Setup.”
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor is not connected.
Position
POSITION
34
°
34. 5678' N
120
°
34. 5678' W
WPT POSITION
34
120
°
°
14. 5678' N
14. 5678' W
STW
10.0 kt
SOG
10.0 kt
COURSE
101.6
°
M
BEARING
9.2
°
M
DEPTH
1324.1 ft
RANGE
0.18 nm
TEMP
18.2
°
C
Depth Water temperature
Bearing to
Waypoint
Range to waypoint
Speed through water
Waypoint
Position
Course
Speed over ground
Nav data displays
3-6
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up, course-up and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, press the
[HIDE/SHOW] key followed by the MODE soft key. Each press of the key changes the presentation mode and presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen) cyclically in the sequence of North-up,
Course-up and Auto course-up.
3.2.1 North-up
North (zero degree) is at the top of the display and own ship is shown with a filled circle. This mode is useful for long-range navigation.
34
°
22. 3456’N 359.9
°
M TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456’E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
WP-002 FISH
NAV
POS
D.BOX
ON/ OFF
BRIDGE
Plotter display, north-up mode
3-7
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.2.2 Course-up
The course-up mode is useful for monitoring ship’s progress towards a waypoint.
The destination is at the top of the screen when a destination is set. When no destination is set, the course or heading is at the top of the screen at the moment the course-up mode is selected. A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.
Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must be output from the NavNet display unit connected to the GPS navigator in order to correctly orient the own ship marker in the course-up mode on other NavNet display units.
+ 34
°
22. 3456'N 272.4
°
M TRIP CU
080
°
22. 3456'E 15.9 nm 99.9 nm
16.0nm
WPT 001
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
CSE UP
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D.BOX
ON /OFF
Plotter display, course-up mode, destination set
The course is at the top of screen at the moment the auto course-up mode is selected. In this mode, the current course is kept at the top of the screen when the change is within 22.5 degrees. For example, if your vessel turns larger than
22.5 degrees to port or starboard, the chart display will rotate so that your course is pointing towards the top of the screen again. A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.
+ 34
°
22. 3456'N 272.4
°
M TRIP CU
080
°
22. 3456'E 15.9 nm 99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
AT CU
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Plotter display, auto course-up mode
3-8
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.3 Shifting the Display
The plotter display can be shifted as below.
1. Use the trackball to locate the cursor at a screen edge. The screen shifts in the direction opposite of cursor location.
2. To turn off the cursor, press the CENTER soft key. This also returns the own ship marker to the screen center.
Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The
[-] key expands the chart range; the [+] key shrinks it. The available ranges are as below.
Charts scales
512 2048 km 0.23 0.46 0.93 1.85 3.70 7.41 14.8 29.6
59.3 119 237 474 948 1896 3742 sm 0.144 0.29 0.58 1.15 2.30 4.60 9.21 18.4
36.8 73.7 147 295 589 1178 2356
Note:
When the display is expanded or shrunk beyond the range of the chart card in use the message “NO CHART” appears, along with the appropriate chart icon. See the illustration on the next page for details.
3-9
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.1 Chart card overview
Your system reads FURUNO and NavCharts ™ (NAVIONICS) charts, or C-MAP charts, depending on the type of display unit you have.
When you insert a suitable chart card in the slot and own ship is near any cartographic object, a chart appears. If a wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart scale is selected, landmasses will appear hollow. Chart icons appear at the top of the display to help you select a suitable chart scale. The table below shows the chart icons and their meanings.
Chart icons and their meanings
Icon Meaning
Proper card is not inserted or chart scale is too small.
Operate the RANGE key to adjust chart scale.
Chart scale is too large.
Operate the RANGE key to adjust chart scale.
Suitable chart scale is selected.
3-10
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement
When the [RANGE] key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the chart. These frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart can be enlarged in the current range.
Sample chart (Japan), showing indices
When a chart cannot be displayed
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:
• When the chart scale is too large or too small.
• When scrolling the chart outside the indices.
When this happens, select proper chart scale.
Note: Indices can be turned on or off. For further details see “Chart border line” on page 5-14 for FURUNO and NAVIONICS charts and page 5-16 for
C-MAP charts.
3-11
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.5.3 FURUNO and NavCharts ™ charts
Chart symbols
The table below shows FURUNO and NavCharts ™ chart symbols and their meanings.
Chart symbols
Symbol Description
Summit
Wreck
Lighthouse
Lighted Buoy
Buoy
Radio Station
Symbol Description
Position of Sounding
Obstruction
Fishing Reef
Platform
Anchorage
Data for aids to navigation
Selected FURUNO and NavCharts ™ charts can show buoy and lighthouse data.
Simply place the cursor on the lighthouse or buoy mark.
Place the cursor on a lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse mark
Example of data displayed
Range and bearing from own ship
Period (ex.: 6 seconds)
Visibility in nautical mile (ex.: 12 miles)
NAVAID: /FL 6S 12M
FROM OS 52.38nm 48.0
°
FL : Flashing
F : Fixed light
F FL : Fixed and Flashing light
MO : Morse code light
Oc : Occulting light
Example of buoy, lighthouse data
3-12
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Port service icons (NavCharts ™ only)
Selected NavCharts show services available at ports, with icons.
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired.
2. Push the [ENTER] knob.
3. Roll the trackball horizontally to select icon desired at the top of the display.
The services available appear directly below the icon selected.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Detailed information of service selected
List of services at the port selected
34
°
22. 3456'N 359.9
°
M TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
FIRST AID
16.0nm
Emergency medical service
Fueling station
Water supply station
Traveler's service station
Customer service station
Marine equipment service
CANCEL
Sailboat icon (Port)
Port Information center
Plotter display, showing port service display
3-13
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Cursor and data display
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also show information about caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-MAP charts. In addition, you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.
1. Press the trackball to turn the cursor on.
2. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the position desired.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.
Objects
Navigation mark, fixed
Beacon, generic
Light
Light
Depth area
Source of data
W
Objects window
4. Use the trackball to select the item desired.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to display details for object selected.
Navigation Mark, fixed
Light
Color
White
Height
12.0 Meters
Light characteristic flashing
Sectorlimit one
64.0 Degrees
Sectorlimit two
138.0 Degrees
Signal group
(3)
Signal period
10.0 Seconds
Example of caution area window
6. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
7. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
3-14
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Icon data
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
+ 34
°
22. 3456'N 359.9
°
M TRIP
NU
080
°
22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON / OFF
Lighthouse icon
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to show data. For example, the following window appears for a lighthouse.
Objects
Lighthouse
Tower
Light
Underwater Lock
Depth contour
Depth contour
Depth area
Source of data
Object windows
3. Use the trackball to select the item desired.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to display detailed information.
3-15
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Navigation mark, fixed
Light.
Color
white
Height
7. 00 Meters
Light characteristic
occulting
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Sample lighthouse data
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Tide information
The C-MAP NT chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date. Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.
1. Press the trackball to place the cursor on a Tide icon ( T ).
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.
+ 34 24. 3456 N 359.9 NU
OBJECTS
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
Tide height
Cartographic area
Source of data
T RETURN
Objects window
3. Use the trackball to select Tide height.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the TIDE window.
3-16
Horizontal
Cursor
Vertical
Cursor
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
+ 34 24. 3456 N 359.9 NU
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
0.74
DATE
0.61
0.48
0.35
0 4 8 12 16 20 24
Time: 04:35
Height: 0.45ft
Draught: 0.65ft
01/07/30 +13:30
43
°
32.860N
010
°
18.022E
RETURN
Port info
LIVORNO (LEGHORN)
High Water(max)
0.86ft(13:30 L)
Low Water(min)
0.35ft(21:00 L)
Sunrise
07:52L
Sunset
16:53 L
Tide window
5. Press the DATE soft key to open the DATE window.
CHANGE DATE
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)
0 1. 01. 2001
LIMIT: 31.12.2099
Date window
6. Use the trackball to position the cursor where desired, then enter value with the alphanumeric keys. Repeat to enter complete date.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to show the tidal graph for entered date.
8. Use the trackball to locate the vertical cursor on the hour desired.
9. Use the trackball to shift the level cursor to select draught.
10. See the time, height and draught indications below the tide graph for tide information.
11. Press the RETURN soft key to close the TIDE window.
3-17
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from position-fixing equipment. This section shows you what you can do with track, from turning it on or off to changing its plotting interval. In the default setting, own ship’s track is turned on and is displayed in red.
Own ship track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR WHITE
INTERVALTIME
TIME INTERVAL00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK) 2000 POINTS
(MARK MEMORY) (6000)POINTS
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T & M
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
Track control menu
2. Use the trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the track display window.
4. Use the trackball to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK
STATUS window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above as an example, 1234 points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.
3-18
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Target track
Target track, NMEA format TTM (Tracked Target Message) data sentence, may be turned on or off as desired. The default setting is ON.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the trackball to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
4. Use the trackball to select to ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track
When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to record its track. You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory, as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
TRACK
CONTROL
TRACK
CONTROL
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR WHITE
INTERVALTIME
TIME INTERVAL00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK) 2000 POINTS
(MARK MEMORY) (6000)POINTS
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T & M
TRACK
RESUME
TRACK
HALT
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR WHITE
INTERVALTIME
TIME INTERVAL00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK) 2000 POINTS
(MARK MEMORY) (6000)POINTS
EDIT
TRACK
HALT
ERASE
T & M
MARK
SETUP
MARK
SETUP
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
NOT TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
RETURN
Track is plotted
Track not plotted
Track control menu
2. Press the TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK
HALT” and the indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS window changes to “NOT TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed at the top of the plotter display and own ship marker becomes a hollow circle.
To restart plotting the track, press the TRACK HALT soft key
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-19
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.6.3 Changing track color
Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to discriminate between previous day’s track, etc.
Own ship’s track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
TRACK COLOR
▲
¡
¡
¡
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
Own ship track color window
4. Use the trackball to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Target track
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white (default setting).
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the trackball to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
4. Use the trackball to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-20
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from position-fixing equipment is stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A shorter interval provides for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage time of the track is reduced. When the track memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.
Track plotting method
Track may be plotted by time or distance. The default setting is “time.”
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the trackball to select INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the plot window.
INTERVAL
▲
¤
¡
▼
TIME
DISTANCE
Interval window
4. Use the trackball to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is useful for conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat is stationary.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Track plotting interval
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the trackball to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as appropriate.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window, depending on what you selected at step 2.
TIME INTERVAL
Setting range: 0 min 1 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec
Default setting: 10 sec
0 0m10s
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)
DISTANCE INTERVAL
Setting range: 0.01 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)
Default setting: 0.1 nm
0 0.10nm
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)
Interval windows
3-21
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. Use the trackball to select digit and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
The CLEAR soft key functions to clear an entire line of data.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting
The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount may be distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and
6000 points for marks.
When you change the track memory setting, all tracks and marks in the memory are erased. If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see the paragraph “6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card.”
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the trackball to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track memory window.
TRACK MEMORY
2 000/8000 POINTS
Track memory window
4. Use the trackball to select digit and use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
5. Push the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if you are sure to change the track memory capacity.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-22
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You can erase ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color and by area.
Erasing own ship track by area
You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
ERASE
EDIT
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Erase menu
2. Use the trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA, then press the EDIT soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you want to ease track from.
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to ease track from.
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete the track.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to delete the track selected.
8. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
3-23
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Erasing own ship track by color
You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR, then press the
EDIT soft key.
ERASE TRK BY COLOR
▲
¡
¡
¡
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
Erase track by color window
3. Use the trackball to select the color you want to erase, then push the
[ENTER] knob.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the track color selected.
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all own ship track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ERASE ALL TRACKS, then press the EDIT soft key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all own ship track.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all target tracks
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS, then press the EDIT soft key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all target tracks.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
3-24
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot.
Marks can be inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors: Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white.
¡
✕
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line
1. Place the cursor where you want a mark to appear.
2. Press the [SHOW/HIDE] key (if necessary) followed by the MARK ENTRY soft key.
The mark is inscribed in the size, color and shape selected on the mark & line menu. The default mark attributes are size, large; color, yellow, and shape, hollow circle ( ○ ).
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes
You can select the shape, size and color for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and MARK
SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS/LINES COLOR YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
LINES STYLE
MARKS SIZE
.
¡
LARGE
EDIT
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Marks & lines menu
3. Select MARKS/LINES COLOR, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the trackball to choose color desired (default setting: yellow).
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Select MARKS SHAPE, then press the EDIT soft key.
3-25
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
MARKS SHAPE
▲
¡
¡
¡
¡
¤ ¡
¡
¡
✕
▼
Marks shape window
7. Use the trackball to select mark shape desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select MARKS SIZE, then press the EDIT soft key.
9. Use the trackball to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as appropriate.
10. Press the ENTER soft key.
11. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc.
You can even construct simple charts.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS &
LINES MARKS/LINES COLOR YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
LINES STYLE
MARKS SIZE
.
¡
LARGE
EDIT
3-26
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Marks & lines menu
2. Select LINES STYLE, then press the EDIT soft key.
LINES STYLE
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
- - - -
Lines style window
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3. Use the trackball to select line style desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
The line style “dot” disables line drawing. Edge of lines is determined by mark shape. For example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a circle as below.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Erasing an individual mark
1. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to erase the mark.
Erasing an individual line
Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase, then press the [CLEAR] key.
Placing the cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both line segments.
Erasing marks, lines by area
This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA, then press the EDIT soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you want to erase marks and lines from.
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to erase marks and lines from.
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete the marks/lines selected. Press the [ENTER] knob to delete.
7. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all marks, lines
You can erase all marks and lines collectively. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES, then press the EDIT soft key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all marks and lines.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
3-27
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.8 Waypoints
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage whether it be a starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the simplest piece of information your equipment requires to get you to a destination, in the shortest distance possible.
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You may enter a waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position (see page
1-14 for details), by cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list
(manual input of latitude and longitude).
Entering a waypoint at own ship position
Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint.
This new waypoint is saved to the waypoint list, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
Entering a waypoint with the cursor
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY
CURSOR soft keys. The plotter display appears.
3. Operate the trackball to place the cursor where you want to enter a waypoint.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows waypoint mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date), position of waypoint and proximity alarm radius.
MARK NAME
34
°
0 0 1 W P T
135
°
21.000'W
COMMENT
002WPT
°
0.00nm
00:00 01JAN00
34
°
44.000'N
LAT
°
21.000'W
LON 003WPT
359.9
°
0.00nm
3 4
°
1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N
1 3 4
°
1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W
34
°
44.000'N 359.9
°
0.00nm
0 . 0 0 n m
NEW
WPT
SELECT
MARK
COORD
TYPE
N< - - >S
E< - - >W
SAVE
RETURN
Waypoint window
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change waypoint data.
3-28
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
6. Press the SELECT MARK soft key.
7. Press the MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.
SELECT MARK
Waypoint mark shape selection window
8. Operate the trackball to select shape desired.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. Press the SELECT MARK and MARK COLOR soft keys in that order to open the waypoint mark color selection window. Select the color desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
SELECT COLOR
▲
¡
¡
¡
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
Waypoint mark color selection window
Note:
You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the proximity alarm radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or color, enter all zeroes as the proximity alarm radius.
11. You can change the name (6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L position and the proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows: a) Use the trackball to select the NAME, COMMENT, position box or
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for audio and visual alarms when your boat nears a waypoint by the distance specified. The proximity alarm must be turned on in the ALARM menu to use this feature. For details see the paragraph “3.11.6 Proximity alarm.”) b) Use the trackball to select location. c) Enter appropriate alphanumeric character with the alphanumeric keys.
12. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
13. Enter another waypoint, or press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-29
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing
This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and bearing to a target found on a radar.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY RNG &
BRG soft keys.
3. A red “X” appears at own ship position, and it is the origin point for range and bearing. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the location desired.
Range and bearing from own ship to the cursor appear at the top of the display.
Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location desired. Operate the trackball to select location, then press the START
POINT soft key.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of waypoint and proximity alarm radius.
MARK NAME
34
°
0 0 1 W P T
135
°
21.000'W
COMMENT
002WPT
°
0.00nm
00:00 01JAN00
34
°
44.000'N
LAT
°
21.000'W
LON 003WPT
359.9
°
0.00nm
3 4
°
1 2 . 1 3 4 ' N
1 3 4
°
1 2 . 3 4 5 ' W
34
°
44.000'N
135
°
21.000'W
359.9
°
0 . 0 0 n m
NEW
WPT
SELECT
MARK
COORD
TYPE
N< - - >S
E< - - >W
SAVE
RETURN
Waypoint window
5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-29.
6. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
7. Enter another waypoint as above, or press the [MENU] key to finish.
3-30
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list
You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest) or
ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in ALPHANUMERIC order) soft key.
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 350.9
°
RNG 3.80nm
35
°
135
°
47.010'N
21.000'W
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 050.9
°
RNG 1.98nm
34
°
42.000'N
135
°
21.050'W
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 065.9
°
RNG 1.83nm
34
°
41.000'N
135
°
21.030'W
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 144.9
°
RNG 4.93nm
38
°
44.300'N
135
°
21.010'W
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR --
WPT
ALPHA
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 065.9
°
RNG 1.83nm
34
°
41.000'N
135
°
21.030'W
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 050.9
°
RNG 1.98nm
34
°
42.000'N
135
°
21.050'W
ABALONE BRG 350.9
°
RNG 3.80nm
00:00 01JAN01 35
°
47.010'N
135
°
21.000'W
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 144.9
°
RNG 4.93nm
38
°
44.300'N
135
°
21.010'W
WPT
LOCAL
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
Alphanumeric waypoint list Local waypoint list
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure on the previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.
5. Select the position box and enter position desired.
6. If desired, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-29.
7. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter display.
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.
4. Use the trackball to select the waypoint you want to edit.
5. Press the EDIT WPT soft key.
6. Edit data as appropriate.
7. Press the SAVE soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-31
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display
You may edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and
WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to change. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the EDIT/MOVE soft key:
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.
MOVE WPT:
Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint. See paragraph 3.8.3.
5. Press the appropriate soft key. For the “EDIT WPT,” the waypoint entry window appears; edit data as appropriate. For “MOVE WPT,” do the following: a) Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the location desired for the waypoint. A line connects previous position and new position. b) Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and its position is changed on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as destination or is part of a route, you are asked if you are sure to move the waypoint. In this case, push the [ENTER] knob to move the waypoint, or press the [CLEAR] key to cancel. c) Press the [MENU] key to finish.
Range and bearing from own ship to cursor
(1) Select waypoint to move,
then press EDIT/MOVE
and MOVE WPT soft keys.
(2) Drag cursor to new position,
then push the [ENTER] knob.
+
34
°
22. 345’N 86.6
°
M
080
°
TRIP
NU
22. 345’E 4.53nm 99.9 nm
16.0nm
FISH
WP-002
BRIDGE
RNG
BRG
CANCEL
Press to alternately display range/bearing from own ship to cursor, range/bearing from original waypoint position to cursor position.
Below is an example of the range/bearing from original waypoint position to cursor position.
+ 34
°
22. 3456’N FROM 5.3
°
M
080
°
22. 3456’E FISH 1.45 nm
Plotter display
3-32
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Erasing a waypoint directly from the plotter display
1. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase.
A flashing diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is correctly selected.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the menu
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and
WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to erase. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key followed by the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the waypoint.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.
4. Use the trackball to select the waypoint you want to erase.
5. Press the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list and the plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-33
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts™)
You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you may turn them off.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
LAT/LON GRID
TEXT INFORMATION
WAYPOINTS
WAYPOINT NAMES
CHART BORDER LINES
LANDMASS
BACKGROUND
NAVAIDS
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
OTHER SYMBOLS
MARK SIZE
GREEN
ON
LARGE
ON
ON
BRT YELLOW
BLACK
ON
ON
WHITE
LARGE
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
Chart details menu
3. Use the trackball to select WAYPOINTS.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the trackball to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape selected.
OFF: Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints currently used in navigation are shown regardless of this setting.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-34
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft keys to show the alphanumeric list.
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 350.9
°
RNG 3.80nm
35
°
47.010'N
135
°
21.000'W
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 050.9
°
RNG 1.98nm
34
°
42.000'N
135
°
21.050'W
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 065.9
°
RNG 1.83nm
34
°
41.000'N
135
°
21.030'W
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 144.9
°
RNG 4.93nm
38
°
44.300'N
135
°
21.010'W
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR --
WPT
ALPHA
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
Search window
Alphanumeric list
3. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter up to three alphanumeric characters in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at the top of the screen.
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-35
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.9 Routes
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes, requiring a series of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after another. The sequence of waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called a route. Your unit can automatically advance to the next waypoint on a route, so you do not have to change the destination waypoint repeatedly.
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.
Entering a route with existing waypoints
This method constructs routes by using existing waypoints.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the ROUTE menu. (No data will be shown if there are no routes entered.)
Total length of route
Route name
Number of waypoints in route
001
LENGTH
25.6 nm
WAYPOINTS
35
002 LENGTH
56.7 nm
WAYPOINTS
2
003
LENGTH
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
004 LENGTH
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR --
Route menu
ROUTE
GOTO
NEW
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
ERASE
ROUTE
RETURN
3-36
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.
NEW
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME
0 0 1 PLOT
COMMENT
LOCAL
LIST
ALPHA
LIST
CONECT
CANCEL
New route entry screen
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A route name may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.
7. Use the trackball to select a waypoint, then press the ADD WPT soft key to add it to the route.
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.
Note: To clear last-entered waypoint, press the ERASE LST WP soft key.
Each press of this key deletes the last waypoint entered.
9. Press the SAVE soft key to register the route.
10. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Entering a route with the cursor
This method allows you to construct a route directly from the plotter display, using existing waypoints or new positions. Any new position will be saved as a waypoint, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
1. Follow steps 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.
2. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.
3. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD WP soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
4. Press the ADD WP soft key (or ADD NEW WP soft key).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to register the route.
3-37
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Creating voyage-based routes
You can create routes based on your ship’s track. The route can be created automatically by time or distance, or manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous track.
The “SAVE” icon ( S A
V E
) appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is being created.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.
001 LENGTH
25.6 nm
WAYPOINTS
35
002 LENGTH
56.7 nm
WAYPOINTS
2
003
LENGTH
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
004 LENGTH
21.1 nm
WAYPOINTS
3
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR --
SAVE
ROUTE
NEW
SELECT
ROUTE
RETURN
Save route menu
4. Press the NEW soft key to show the new route window.
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points onto the end of an existing route, select the route with the trackball, then press the SELECT
ROUTE soft key instead of the NEW soft key. Then, go to step 6.
Next consecutive route number
ROUTE NAME
0 0 6
COMMENT
SAVE
ROUTE
BCKTRK
TIME
BCKTRK
DIST
MANUAL
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION
TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.
CANCEL
Save route window
5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.
3-38
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by range or manual entry, by pressing BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK RANGE or MANUAL soft key as appropriate. For manual entry, go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK
DIST one of the following displays appears.
TIME INTERVALDISTANCE INTERVAL
0 0h01m 0 0.1nm
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.) (When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)
Displays for entry of time, distance interval
7. Enter interval desired with the trackball and the alphanumeric keys. Press the
START LOG and RETURN soft keys followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu. At this moment, a voyage-based route will be created.
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following: a) Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own ship position. A new waypoint is created under the youngest empty waypoint number and added to the route. (At this time you may close the
SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the RETURN soft key followed by the
[MENU] key.) b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.
To stop recording waypoints and save the route
You can stop recording waypoints and save the route as shown in the procedure below. When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total 35 WPTS have been already registered in the route. Stop creating voyage-based route.” is displayed. In this case, automatically creating voyage-based route stops.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and CREATE
VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.
2. Press the FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoints and save the route.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-39
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new route.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key.
5. If desired enter route name and comment.
6. Press the CONECT soft key.
7. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter the route name for the first route, beneath FIRST in the connect route window.
ROUTE NAME
0 0 1
NEW
ROUTE
F < -- > R
COMMENT
CONNECT ROUTE
FIRST SECOND
SAVE
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FORWARD FORWARD
CANCEL
Connect route window
8. Press the F <− −> R soft key to select direction to follow the waypoints of the route, forward or reverse.
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.
10. Press the SAVE soft key.
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is exceeded an error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one or both routes so the total number of waypoints does not exceed 35.
3-40
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Waypoints can be inserted in a route as follows:
Inserting a waypoint from the route list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the trackball to select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST soft key.
ROUTE NAME: 001
COMMENT:
01
007WPT
48
°
18.290'N
123
°
14.286'W
02
005WPT
48
°
17.341'N
123
°
10.232'W
03
003WPT
48
°
20.261'N
123
°
11.658'W
04
006WPT
48
°
19.862'N
123
°
04.190'W
LEG
90.0
°
2.86nm
322.6
°
3.08nm
75.2
°
4.99nm
152.5
°
19.87nm
EDIT
ROUTE
INSERT
WPT
REMOVE
WPT
CHANGE
WPT
COORD
TYPE
RETURN
Edit route menu
7. Use the trackball to place the cursor at the location where you want to insert a waypoint.
8. Press the INSERT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key as appropriate. The local waypoint list appears.
LOCAL LIST
001
002
003
004
001WPT
34
°
44.111'N
135
°
21.134'W
002WPT
34
°
43.432'N
135
°
41.456'W
003WPT
34
°
14.124'N
135
°
21.567'W
004WPT
34
°
34.490'N
135
°
51.387'W
Waypoint list for editing a route (local list)
3-41
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
9. Use the trackball to select the waypoint you want to insert. (You can switch between the local list and alphanumeric list by using the LOCAL LIST and
ALPHA LIST soft keys.)
10. Press the SELECT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key, whichever is displayed.
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display
Inserting a waypoint before first waypoint or after last waypoint in a route
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the trackball to select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
7. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the route. A flashing diamond appears over the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
8. Press the ADD TO START soft key or the ADD TO END soft key depending on the waypoint you selected at step 7.
9. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD WPT soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
10. Press the ADD WPT soft key (ADD NEW WP soft key).
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a waypoint before the first or last waypoint in a route.”
2. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints. The
SPLIT LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when it is correctly selected.
3. Press the SPLIT LEG soft key.
4. Move the cursor to a new location or select an existing waypoint, in which case the INSERT WPT soft key replaces the INSERT NEW WP soft key.
5. Press the INSERT WPT soft key (INSERT NEW WP soft key).
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-42
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route
Removing a waypoint from the route list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE and LOCAL LIST soft keys.
6. Select the waypoint you want to remove.
7. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.
7. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to remove from the route.
8. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the waypoint removed.
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the trackball to select a route.
5. Press the ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the route, or the [CLEAR] key to escape.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-43
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.10 Navigation
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,” waypoints, port services and routes.
Note : Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting the data sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”
The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the data indefinitely in your unit’s memory.
Selecting quick point entry method
You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1 POINT, 35 POINTS (up to
35 points) or 35PTS/PORT SVC. (For how to navigate to points/port services see “3.10.2 Navigating to ports, port services” on page 3-45.)
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the trackball to select SET GOTO METHOD, then press the EDIT soft key.
GOTO METHOD
¤ 1 POINT
¡ 35 POINTS
¡ 35PTS/PORT SVC
Go to method window
4. Use the trackball to select a method.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Navigating to a single quick point
1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a new location (GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).
2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1, press the GOTO CURSOR or GOTO WPT soft key.
A solid light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship and destination, which is marked as “<QP01>” for cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. This line shows the shortest course to the destination. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to the quick point. Range and bearing from own ship to the destination appear at the top of screen. The quick point location is saved to the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”
3-44
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Navigating to multiple quick points
1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on the previous page.
2. Press the GOTO soft key.
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (SELECT WPT soft key appears) or a new location (ADD QP soft key appears).
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3, press the SELECT WPT or ADD
QP soft key. “QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected. To erase last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the ERASE LST
QP (ERASE LST WP) soft key.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to finish.
A solid light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship and the first point and all other points are connected with a green dashed line with arrows. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to your destination. Quick points are numbered in sequential order from QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a route, under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick
Route).
Selecting a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Operate the trackball to select a waypoint.
2. Press the GOTO WPT soft key.
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
Selecting a waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
4. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.
5. Use the trackball to select a waypoint.
6. Press the GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.
For either of the above methods, a solid light-blue line with arrows runs between waypoint selected and own ship’s position. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to the waypoint. Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.
3-45
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts ™ only )
NavCharts ™ have a port service list which shows services available at ports or harbors. (See page 3-13.) You can use the list to set your destination as follows:
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on page 3-44.
2. Place the cursor on the location desired, then press the GOTO soft key. Soft key titles change as in the figure below.
+ 40
°
45.971'N
13 ° 57.462'E
16.0nm
FROM
OS
0.26 nm
180.2
°
M
GOTO
QUICK
ROUTE
NEAR
SRVC
PUNTA CORNACCHIA
ACCO AMENO
PORT
ISCHIA
PORTO
CASAMICCIOLA
I. ISCHIA
¤
¡
¡
¡
CANCEL
GOTO
Plotter display
3. Press the PORT or NEAR SRVC soft key depending on objective. PORT shows a list of ports in your area. NEAR SRVC displays the port service list.
PORT & SERVICE
▼
SELECT PORT & SRVC
ACCIAROLI
ACQUAMORTA
AGNONE S. NICOLA
AGROPOLI
AMALFI
BAIA
CAPRI
CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA
Port list (Italy)
¡ ¡
¡ ¡
▼
Port services
Port services and sample port list
3-46
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. If you selected PORT at step 3, use the trackball to select a port, then press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the
[ENTER] knob. (If you want to go directly to that port, simply press the ADD
QP soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.)
If you selected NEAR SRVC at step 3, select service mark desired with the trackball and then push the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Then, the display shows the locations of those services nearest you. (The figure below shows the location of filling stations in an area in southern Italy.) Use the trackball to place the “hand cursor” on the port service icon desired, then press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the
[ENTER] knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected, simply press the ADD QP soft key followed by pushing the [ENTER] knob.)
+ 40
°
45.971'N
13
°
57.462'E
16.0nm
FROM
OS
0.26 nm
180.2
°
M
GOTO
PUNTA CORNACCHIA
ACCO AMENO
ENTER
ISCHIA
PORTO
CASAMICCIOLA
I. ISCHIA
CANCEL
GOTO
Sample filling station locations (southern Italy)
3-47
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.10.4 Following a route
Selecting the route to follow
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route list.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the waypoint nearest own ship.
FISH
359.2
°
M 104.5
°
M TRIP
83.2nm
10.0 kt 0.7
GOTO
ROUTE
16.0 nm
WPT002
FISH
GOTO
WPT
WPT001
RVRSE
ROUTE
CRAB
RETURN
Plotter display, route selected as destination
6. Operate the trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route from where to start navigating the route.
7. Press the GOTO WPT or FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action taken at step 6.
A solid light-blue line runs between own ship and first waypoint. Green dashed lines connect all other waypoints. The arrows on the lines show the direction to traverse the route.
Navigating waypoints in reverse order
Press the RVRSE ROUTE soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob to navigate waypoints in reverse order. The arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.
3-48
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Restarting navigation
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your intended course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return to the original course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in the figure below. In these cases, use the restart navigation function to restart navigation.
Line 2
Obstacle
Line 1
Original course
Example of when to restart navigation
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
TO Waypoint (WPT name in reverse video)
Passed waypoint (gray characters)
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination
Replaces triangle when selecting a route leg.
ETA 23:59 30. APR
01
007WPT
005WPT
03
003WPT
04
006WPT
48
°
18.290'N
123
°
14.286'W
LEG
48
°
17.341'N
123
°
10.232'W
90.0
°
2.86nm
48
°
20.261'N
123
°
11.658'W
322.6
°
3.08nm
48
°
19.862'N
123
°
04.190'W
75.2
°
4.99nm
152.5
°
19.87nm
LOG
RE-
START
STOP
RVRSE
SPEED
Replaced by
"FOLLOW LEG" when selecting a route leg.
COORD
TYPE
Log display
4. Use the trackball to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is selected the single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.
5. Press the RESTART soft key or FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.
Note: Navigation may be restarted from the plotter display, with the
RESTART key, when a single quick point (QP<01>) is selected for navigation.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-49
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Setting speed for ETA calculation
Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate
ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) to a destination.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
4. Press the SPEED soft key.
SPEED FOR ETA
▲
¤
¡
▼
SPD 0 10.0kt
GPS AVG. SPEED
Select speed for ETA window
5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable) by selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Switching waypoints
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint by one of the three methods below.
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the destination waypoint when the boat comes passes an imaginary perpendicular line passing through the center of the destination waypoint.
ARRVL ALM CRCL:
Destination waypoint is automatically switched when the boat comes within the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see the paragraph 3.11.2 Arrival alarm.
MANUAL: The destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the
RESTART soft key (see page 3-49). This function is operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the GOTO method (see page 3-44).
WPT 2 WPT 2
Waypoint switched at this point.
Waypoint switched at this point.
WPT 1
Perpendicular
WPT 1
Arrival Alarm Circle
Automatic waypoint switching methods
3-50
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
To select waypoint switching method do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the trackball to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.
5. Use the trackball to select appropriate waypoint switching method;
PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
4. Press the STOP soft key.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob.
6. Press the RELEASE soft key.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob.
3-51
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11 Alarms
The plotter section has eight conditions which generate both audio and visual alarms: arrival alarm, anchor watch alarm, XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm, proximity alarm, speed alarm, trip alarm, water temperature alarm and bottom alarm. (The bottom and water temperature alarms, which require depth and water temperature data, may also be set on the sounder alarm menu. For these alarms see Chapter 4.)
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by pressing the [ALARM] key.
AUDIO ALARM
ARRIVAL ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM OFF
XTE ALARM
SPEED ALARM
OFF 0.050nm
OFF
ALARM1
EDIT
TRIP ALARM OFF 0000.0nm
CLEAR
ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
NEXT
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
BOTTOM ALARM OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
ALARM2
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
PREV.
PAGE
Page 1 Page 2
Plotter alarm menu
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the alarm menu.
2. Use the trackball to select AUDIO ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
¡
¤
¡
INT & EXT BUZZ
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
Audio alarm window
4. Use the trackball to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF as appropriate. This turns on or off the audio alarm globally for all alarms, including radar.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
3-52
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination waypoint. The area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you approach from the outside of the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is active a red dashed circle marks the arrival alarm area. Note that the arrival alarm and anchor watch alarm can be turned on together.
Alarm range
Own ship
: Alarm area
Destination waypoint
How the arrival alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ARRIVAL ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.
ARRIVAL ALARM
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON 0.010nm
OFF
Arrival alarm window
4. Use the trackball to select ON.
5. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available arrival alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
3-53
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be at rest. When the anchor watch is active, a red dashed circle with an “X” at its center marks the anchor watch area.
Alarm setting
Your ship's position where you start the anchor watch alarm.
: Alarm
area
How the anchor watch alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON 0.010nm
OFF
Anchor watch alarm window
4. Use the trackball to select ON.
5. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available anchor watch setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and then turn it on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.
3-54
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm
The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the
XTE alarm is active two red dashed lines mark the XTE alarm area.
Own ship position
Alarm setting
Destination waypoint
Intended course
: Alarm
How the XTE alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the trackball to select XTE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.
XTE ALARM
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON 0.050nm
OFF
XTE alarm window
4. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available XTE alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within or under/over the speed range set.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the trackball to select SPEED ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm window.
SPEED ALARM
▲
¡ WITHIN
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
¡ UNDER/OVER
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
¤ OFF
▼
Speed alarm window
3-55
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. Use the trackball to select WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, or OFF as appropriate
5. For WITHIN and UNDER/OVER use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm range: Operate the trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is marked with the proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that waypoint on the waypoint list. When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The proximity mark remains on the screen until the waypoint is erased.
Radius in proportion to proximity alarm radius, which is set on waypoint list
001WPT
Proximity mark
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the trackball to select PROXIMITY ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm window.
PROXIMITY ALARM
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON
OFF
Proximity alarm window
4. Use the trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
3-56
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
The trip alarm informs you when you have traveled a certain distance.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the trackball to select TRIP ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.
TRIP ALARM
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON 0000.0nm
OFF
Trip alarm window
4. Select ON.
5. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
3-57
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
When an alarm setting has been violated, the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears and is red. Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the ALARM menu. In the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the alarm information window.
Alarm information window
AUDIO ALARM
ARRIVAL ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
ON 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM
XTE ALARM
SPEED ALARM
OFF
OFF 0.050nm
OFF
ALARM1
EDIT
TRIP ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
ARRIVED
OFF 0000.0nm
AT WAYPOINT XXX !
CLEAR
ALARM
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
Speaker icon
XXX = Destination waypoint name
Plotter alarm menu, page 1
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if it was not done with the [CLEAR] key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case, press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.
3. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background color when the [CLEAR] key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not change regardless of how many other alarms are violated.
3-58
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
Alarm messages
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
ARRIVED AT WAYPOINT XXX!
(XXX = waypoint name)
Arrival alarm violated.
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE AREA! Proximity alarm violated.
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH LIMIT! Anchor watch alarm violated.
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT! XTE alarm violated.
SPEED ALARM!
TEMPERATURE ALARM!
Speed alarm violated.
Water temperature alarm violated.
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE EXCEEDED Trip alarm violated.
3-59
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance
Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip distance to zero as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and GENERAL SETUP soft keys in that order to show the GENERAL SETUP menu.
GENERAL
SETUP1
KEY BEEP
LANGUAGE
ON
ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT
TEMPERATURE UNIT
DEPTH UNIT nm, kt
°
F ft
TEMPERATURE SOURCE NMEA
DEPTH SOURCE
RESET TRIP LOG
NMEA
NO
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
General setup menu, page 1
3. Use the trackball to select RESET TRIP LOG, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the trackball to select YES, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-60
With connection of the optional Network Sounder ETR-6/10N you can show video sounder images on the display.
4.1 Principle Operation
The video sounder determines the distance between its transducer and underwater objects such as fish, lake bottom or seabed and displays the results on screen. It does this by utilizing the fact that an ultrasonic wave transmitted through water travels at a nearly constant speed of 4800 feet (1500 meters) per second. When a sound wave strikes an underwater object such as fish or sea bottom, part of the sound wave is reflected back toward the source (transducer).
Thus by calculating the time difference between the transmission of a sound wave and the reception of the reflected sound wave, the depth to the object can be determined.
The entire process begins in the network sounder. Transmitter power is sent to the transducer as a short pulse of electrical energy. The electrical signal produced by the transmitter is converted into an ultrasonic signal by the transducer and transmitted into the water. Any returning signals from intervening objects (such as a fish school) are received by the transducer and converted into an electrical signal. The signals are then amplified in the amplifier section, and finally, displayed on screen.
The picture displayed is made up of a series of vertical scan lines, one for each transmission. Each line represents a snapshot of what has occurred beneath the boat. A series of snapshots are accumulated side by side across the screen, and the resulting contours of the bottom and fish between the bottom and surface are displayed.
0
20
40
60
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Underwater conditions and video sounder display
4-1
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.2.1 Selecting a sounder display
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single frequency, marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and
A-scope.
To select a display;
1. Press the [DISP] key and then select sounder display desired.
2. If not already displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] soft key to show the sounder soft keys.
3. Press the DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.
DISPLAY MODE
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
DUAL FREQ
SINGLE FREQ
MARKER ZOOM
BOTTOM ZOOM
BOTTOM LOCK
BOTTOM DSCRM
Display mode window
4. Use the trackball or the [ENTER] knob to select a display.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
Note: On menus which show the RETURN soft key you may use it or the
ENTER knob to register setting and close the window.
4-2
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.2.2 Description of sounder displays
Single-frequency display
Zero line
Icons (alarm, battery, simulation)
°
50
F
Minute marker
Variable Range Marker
(White)
Time
Depth scale
0'30" 0
SOUNDER
SINGLE
Display mode
SOUNDER DUAL
SOUNDER SINGLE
SOUNDER M. ZOOM
SOUNDER B. ZOOM
SOUNDER B/L
SOUNDER B/D
50.0
50
SHIFT
Color bar
Temp. scale
40
30
Fish echo
Cross-hair cursor
100
AUTO/
D.BOX
FREQ
50 /200
Water temp.
graph
150 DISPLY
MODE
Water temp.
display
120
50k 200
Bottom echo
Soft keys
Tx frequency
Depth
Indications on the single frequency display
Note: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water temperature sensor. It can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE GRAPH on the
SOUNDER MENU.
Selecting transmission frequency
The single frequency display shows either the 50 kHz picture or 200 kHz picture.
To select transmission frequency, press the FREQ 50/200 soft key. “50” or “200” is highlighted on its key label with each press of the key.
4-3
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Dual-frequency display
The dual-frequency display provides both 50 kHz and 200 kHz pictures. This display is useful for comparing the same picture with two different sounding frequencies.
0.0
4-4
50k 200k
Dual-frequency display
50 kHz picture
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect bottom conditions. The lower the frequency of the pulse, the wider the detection area. Therefore, the 50 kHz frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.
200 kHz picture
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution.
Therefore, the 200 kHz frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.
50 kHz
200 kHz
Sounding area and transmission frequency
Marker-zoom display
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture to full vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the portion to expand by operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can shift with the [ENTER] knob. The area between the VRM and zoom marker is expanded. The length of the segment is equal to one division of the depth scale.
Note: The VRM is set independently from other displays in case of multiple displays.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Fish school
80
50
60
70
-
Fish school
200k
0'20"
0
42.0
50
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VRM
This part is zoomed.
Zoom marker
MARKER-ZOOM
DISPLAY
NORMAL
DISPLAY
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display
Bottom-zoom display
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom range selected on the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu (see paragraph 5.9.3), and is useful for determining bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
Bottom
80
-
0
10
20
30
--
--
--
--
--
--
20.0
200k
0
50
100 -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Zoom marker
BOTTOM-ZOOM
DISPLAY
NORMAL DISPLAY
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display
4-5
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half of the screen and a 10 or 20 feet (3 or 6 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for discriminating bottom fish from the bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu. For details, see paragraph
5.9.3.
Fish school
80
10
8
6
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
-
-
-
200k
0
50
100 -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
NORMAL DISPLAY BOTTOM-LOCK
DISPLAY
Zoom marker
This part is zoomed.
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display
4-6
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Bottom discrimination display
The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
Bottom tail
Long tail = Hard bottom
Short tail = Soft bottom
80
0
2
4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50
-
20.0
200k
50
100
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
Zoom marker
BOTTOM
DISCRIMINATION
DISPLAY
NORMAL DISPLAY
Bottom discrimination display
A-scope display (display only)
The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission with amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right 1/10 of the screen. It is useful for estimating fish species and bottom composition. To turn on the A-scope display, press the DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode desired, then press the A-SCPE soft key to show “ON” on its label. For modes other than SINGLE FREQ the screen must be split horizontally to show the
A-scope display.
84
200k
50
0
-
-
-
-
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
A-scope display
No response
Weak echo (fish)
Strong echo (bottom)
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY A-SCOPE
DISPLAY
A-scope display
4-7
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.2.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays
On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or horizontally, using the SPLIT soft key as below.
0.0
0.0
SPLIT
/
SPLIT
/
200k
50k 200k 50k
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)
4-8
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.3 Automatic Sounder Operation
Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other tasks and do not have the time to adjust the display.
4.3.1 How the automatic sounder works
The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range scale and clutter suppression level according to the depth. It works as follows:
•
The range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of the screen. The range jumps to one step shallower range when the bottom echoes reach a half way point of the full scale from the top and to one step deeper range when they come to the lower edge of the scale.
•
The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown
(default color arrangement).
•
Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.
4.3.2 Types of automatic sounder modes
Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING.
CRUISING is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools.
CRUISING uses a higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not recommended for fish detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter suppression circuit.
4.3.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key.
AUTO MODE
▲
¤
¡
¡
▼
CRUISING
FISHING
OFF (MANUAL)
Mode/frequency window
3. Use the trackball or the [ENTER] knob to select CRUISING or FISHING as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key.
4-9
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.4 Manual Sounder Operation
Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using a fixed gain setting.
The gain, range and range shift functions used together give you the means to select the depth you can see on the screen. The basic range can be thought of as providing a “window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the
“window” to the desired depth.
4.4.1 Selecting the manual mode
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the mode/frequency window.
3. Select OFF (MANUAL).
4. Press the RETURN soft key.
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in feet, meters, fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that the range cannot be changed in the automatic sounder mode.
Default sounder ranges
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft
5 m
3 fa
10 m
5 fa
20 m
10 fa
40 m
20 fa
80 m
40 fa
150 m
80 fa
300 m
150 fa
1200 m
650 fa
3 P/B 5 P/B 10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B 100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B
4.4.3 Adjusting the gain
Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on the screen. Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for shallow waters.
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low
Examples of proper and improper gain
4-10
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Press the [GAIN] key to show the gain window, and adjust the [ENTER] knob or trackball. Current level is shown on the bar, and the setting range is 0-100(%).
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
GAIN 200kHz
▲
HIGH
57
LOW
▼
Gain window
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for 50 kHz and 200 kHz. Use the FREQ 50/200 soft key to select the frequency for which to adjust gain.
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is displayed when you attempt to do so.
The basic range may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the SHIFT soft key followed by adjusting the [ENTER] knob. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Shift
Shift concept
4-11
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.5 Measuring Depth, Time
The VRM measures the depth and the cross-hair cursor, time.
1. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise to shift it downward, clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the trackball to shift the VRM.
2. Roll the trackball horizontally to adjust the cross-hair cursor to measure time.
Depth to VRM
Time for a scan line to travel from the right edge of the display to the cross-hair cursor
0'33"
40.0
Cross-hair cursor
0
50
100
VRM (white)
150
97
50k
200
How to measure depth and time
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication and depth scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor slightly to show them completely. Further, when the display is shifted, the depth scale may obscure the time indication.
4-12
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic equipment on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.
Interference from Electrical inteference other sounder
Types of interference
To reduce interference, do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select NOISE LIMITER, then press the EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter window.
NOISE LIMITER
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
Noise limiter window
4. Use the trackball to select the degree of suppression desired (LOW,
MEDIUM, HIGH), or turn the noise limiter off.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Turn the noise limiter circuit off when no interference exists, otherwise weak echoes may be missed.
4-13
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.7 Reducing Low Level Noise
Light-blue dots may appear over most of the screen. This is mainly due to sediment in the water, or noise. This noise can be suppressed by adjusting
CLUTTER on the SOUNDER SETUP menu.
Appearance of clutter
When the automatic sounder mode is used, clutter is automatically adjusted. To reduce low level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select CLUTTER, then press the EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.
CLUTTER
▲
09
▼
Clutter window
4. Adjust the trackball upward or downward to select clutter rejection level desired; 0 (OFF) through 16. The higher the number the higher the degree of suppression. Note that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes.
Therefore, turn off the clutter when its use is not required.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce display colors.
However, if you do not wish to change the relation between weak and strong echoes, use signal level instead.
4-14
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Sediments in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display in green or light blue. These weak echoes may be erased as below.
Weak echoes
Appearance of weak echoes
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the EDIT soft key to show the signal level window.
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
¡
¡
¡
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
OFF
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
OFF
SL1
SL2
SL3
16-color display 8-color display
Signal level window
4. Use the trackball to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The higher the number the stronger the echo that will be erased.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces display colors. Therefore, if you do not wish to reduce colors, use clutter instead.
4-15
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For example, you may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish echoes near the bottom.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select WHITE MARKER, then press the EDIT soft key to open the white marker window.
WHITE MARKER
▲
OFF
▼
White marker window
4. Use the trackball to select the color to display in white. As you use the trackball, the number in the white marker window changes, the white marker on the echo strength bar shifts and the selected echo color is displayed in white.
←
White marker shows color currently displayed in white.
Color bar (16 color) when white marker function is active
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.
4-16
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run across the screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a fast advance speed will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the screen and a slow advance speed will contract it.
The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s speed.
4.10.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the EDIT soft key to open the picture advance window.
PICTURE ADVANCE
▲
¡
¡
¡
¤
¡
¡
¡
▼
2/1
1/1
1/2
1/4
1/8
1/16
STOP
Picture advance window
4. Use the trackball to select speed desired. The fractions in the window denote the number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example, 1/8 means one scan line is produced every eight transmissions. STOP freezes the display and it is convenient for observing an echo.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: When using the plotter/sounder combination display, advancement of the sounder picture may be temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its display range is being changed.
4-17
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.10.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed
With speed data provided by a speed-measuring device, picture advance speed may be automatically synchronized with ship’s speed. As shown in the figure below the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced with the speed-dependent picture advance mode active, thus it permits judgment of fish school size and abundance at any speed. With the advancement synchronized with ship’s speed the picture advance speed setting (on the previous page) is ignored.
Fish school shrinks as speed is increased; expanded as speed is decreased.
Same size fish schools
Speed
FULL
SPEED
HALF
SPEED
Actual Movement
Normal Mode
Fish schools are shown same size regardless of ship’s speed.
Speed-Dependent Picture Advance Mode
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
2. Select SPD SENSING PIC ADV.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
4. Use the trackball to select ON or OFF (default setting) as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Use the same speed data sentence (STG or STW) throughout the network for smooth advancement of the sounder picture. See the paragraph 6.5 for how to output data through the network.
4-18
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select HUE, then press the EDIT soft key to show the hue window.
HUE
▲
1
▼
Hue window
4. Use the trackball to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You can see the result of your selection on the display.)
Hue no. and background and echo colors
Hue No.
3
4
9
Echo Color
16 color
8 color
Background Color
Blue
Blue
Dark blue
Dark blue
White
White
Black
Black
Monochrome yellow, eight intensities
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
4-19
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12 Alarms
The sounder section has five conditions which generate audio and visual alarms: bottom alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water temperature alarm (temperature sensor required).
You may set up the sounder alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by pressing the [ALARM] key.
AUDIO ALARM INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
FISH ALARM OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L) OFF
CLEAR
ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM RETURN
Sounder alarm menu
4.12.1 Audio alarm on/off
The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the trackball to select ALARM AUDIO.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
¡
¤
¡
INT & EXT BUZZ
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
Alarm audio window
4. Use the trackball to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. External buzzer required to select
“INT+EXT BUZZ.” OFF globally turns the audio alarm on or off for all modes, including radar.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
4-20
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set.
To activate the bottom alarm, the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the trackball to select BOTTOM ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.
BOTTOM ALARM
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤
▼
OFF
Bottom alarm window
4. Use the trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm range with the trackball and numeric keys: Adjust the trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM
SETUP menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the trackball to select FISH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.
FISH ALARM
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤
▼
OFF
Fish alarm window
4. Use the trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the trackball and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the trackball to select digit; hit the appropriate numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
4-21
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12.4 Fish alarm (B/L)
The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined distance from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the trackball to select FISH ALARM (B/L).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.
FISH ALARM (B/L)
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Fish alarm (B/L) window
4. Use the trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the trackball and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
4-22
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12.5 Water temperature alarm
There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF
RANGE. The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is within the range set, and the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is higher or lower than the range set. Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the water temperature alarm on the plotter menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the trackball to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
▲
¡ WITHIN RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0
°
F
¡ OUT OF RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0
°
F
¤
▼
OFF
Water temperature alarm window
4. Use the trackball to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as numeric key to enter alarm range: Adjust the trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to enter value. To switch between plus and minus and vice versa use the +< - ->- soft key.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
4-23
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12.6 When an alarm setting is violated...
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears in red. Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the alarm. At this time the color of the speaker icon changes from red to background color. You can see which alarm has been violated on the alarm menu display. In the example below the bottom alarm has been violated.
To see which alarm(s) has been violated:
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The name of the offending alarm is shown in the
ALARM INFORMATION window.
AUDIO ALARM INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM 0050.0-0100.0ft
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
FISH ALARM OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L) OFF
CLEAR
ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
DEPTH ALARM!
RETURN
Alarm information window
Speaker icon
Sounder alarm menu
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if it has not already been done with the [CLEAR] key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the reason for the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated, the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case, press the NEXT
INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background color when the [CLEAR] key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color remains the same regardless of how many times another alarm is violated.
3. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
4-24
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Alarm messages
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings.
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
DEPTH ALARM! Bottom alarm violated.
FISH ALARM! Fish alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM! Water temperature alarm violated.
4.13 Water Temperature Graph
The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water temperature on the sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-3.) It can be turned on or off as below.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
4-25
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.14 Interpreting the Sounder Display
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the transducer’s position, and moves off the screen when a deep phased range is used.
Zero line
Zero line
Shift
Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in reddish-brown, but the color and width will vary with bottom composition, water depth, frequency, sensitivity, etc.
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or sometimes a third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between them below the first echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the bottom and the surface twice or more in shallow depths.
The color of the bottom echo can be used to help determine the density of the bottom materials (soft or hard). The harder the bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show only a single bottom echo on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return. The range should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when bottom hardness is being determined.
Intensity difference in water depth
Second bottom echo
Rock base
Mud and sand
Bottom echoes
4-26
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.14.3 Fish school echoes
Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the bottom. Usually the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo because its reflection property is much smaller compared to the bottom. The size of the fish school can be ascertained from the density of the display.
Size of fish school
Small school
Large school
Fish school echoes
When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may appear near the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to running into a brick wall, the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar noise sometimes appears when a water temperature difference (thermocline) exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer different temperature zones, so the thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish. 200 kHz tends to show shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air bubbles obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a quick turn or reverses movement. Lowering the picture advance speed may reduce the interruption. However, reconsideration of the transducer installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs frequently.
Surface noise
Caused by aerated water
Thermocline
Surface noise/aeration
4-27
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
This page is intentionally left blank.
4-28
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to suit your needs. For mode-specific menus, e.g. radar, plotter and sounder, make sure that you select the appropriate display when making changes or viewing menu options.
This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar and sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you may display from any mode. These items include language, key beep, units of measurement, data sources, etc.
1. Press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.
GENERAL
SETUP1
KEY BEEP
LANGUAGE
RANGE UNIT
TEMPERATURE UNIT
DEPTH UNIT
ON
ENGLISH nm, kt
°
F ft
TEMPERATURE SOURCE NMEA
DEPTH SOURCE NMEA
RESET TRIP LOG NO
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
LAT/LON DISPLAY
TD DISPLAY
DD
°
MM.MMMM’
LORAN C
SPEED
POSITION DISPLAY
SOG
LAT/LON
TIME DISPLAY 24 HOURS
INFRARED REMOTE MODE A
RANGE & BEARING MODE RHUMB LINE
BEARING READOUT
MAGNETIC VARIATION
MAGNETIC
AUTO 07.0
°
E
GENERAL
SETUP2
EDIT
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
Page 1 Page 2
General setup menu
4. Press the NEXT PAGE or PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if necessary.
5. Use the trackball to select item.
6. Press the EDIT soft key.
7. Use the trackball to select option desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-1
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu
Item Description Setting
Key Beep Turns key beep on/off. On, Off On
Language Chooses menu language. English
Range Unit Chooses unit of range and speed measurement.
English, French,
German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm & yd, kt; nm & m, kt; km & m, km/h; sm
& yd, mph nm, kt
Temperature
Unit
Depth Unit
Chooses unit of water temperature measurement.
Chooses unit of depth measurement.
°C, °F °F ft, m, fa,
P/B (Passi/Braza) ft
Temperature
Source
Chooses source of water temperature data.
NMEA
Depth Source Chooses source of depth data.
Resets distance run to zero.
ETR, NMEA. Select ETR to show water temperature data fed from the network sounder.
ETR, NMEA. Select ETR to show depth data fed from the network sounder.
Yes, No
NMEA
No Reset Trip
Log
Lat/Lon
Display
TD Display
Speed
Chooses how many digits (or seconds) to display after decimal point in latitude and longitude position.
Chooses TD type.
Chooses speed format to display.
DD°MM.MM’,
DD°MM.MMM’,
DD°MM.MMMM’,
DD°MM’SS.S”
Loran C, Decca
SOG (Speed over ground), STW (Speed through water)
LAT/LON, TD
DD°MM.MMMM’
Loran C
SOG
LAT/LON Position
Display
Chooses position display format.
Time Display Chooses time notation.
Infrared
Remote
Mode
Range &
Bearing
Mode
A remote controller can be set exclusively for use with a specific display unit, in the case of multiple
NavNet display units. For further details see the Installation Manual.
Chooses how to calculate range and bearing.
12 hours, 24 hours
A, B, C, D
Rhumb Line: Straight line drawn between two points on a nautical chart.
Great Circle: Shortest course between two points on the surface of the earth.
24 hours
A
Rhumb Line
(Continued on next page)
5-2
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Setting
Bearing
Readout
Chooses bearing display format for course, course over ground and cursor bearing.
True, Magnetic Magnetic
Magnetic
Variation
The magnetic variations for all areas of the earth are preprogrammed into this unit. The preprogrammed variation is accurate for most instances, however you may wish to manually enter a variation. For manual input, select
Manual, hit the EDIT soft key, enter value, then hit the ENTER soft key to set. “AUTO” requires position data.
Auto, Manual Auto (07.0°W)
This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your operational needs.
5.2.1 Radar display setup
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu, which contains items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
EBL REFERENCE
CURSOR POSITION
RELATIVE
RNG & BRG-REL
TUNING AUTO
TX SECTOR BLANKING OFF 000
°
001
°
NOISE REJECTION OFF
BACKGROUND COLOR BLACK/GREEN
ECHO COLOR GREEN
2ND ECHO REJECTION OFF
WATCHMAN TIME 5 minutes
RANGE UNIT
TRAIL MODE nm
RELATIVE
DISPLAY
SETUP
EDIT
D. BOX
RETURN
Radar display setup menu
5-3
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu
Item Description Settings Setting
EBL
Reference
References EBL bearing, shown in the EBL data box, to North (True) or heading (Relative). Relative with no heading input. True only in course-up, north-up and true motion.
True, Relative Relative
Cursor
Position
Chooses how to display cursor position.
RNG &
BRG-REL
Tuning
Note: “RNG & BRG-TRUE” requires heading data, true bearing.
Reverts to relative bearing when heading data is lost.
Selects receiver tuning method. For further details see the paragraph
“2.6 Tuning.”
LAT/LON: Lat/Long position of cursor
TD: Loran C or
Decca TDs
RNG & BRG-REL:
Range and bearing in relative bearing.
RNG & BRG-TRUE:
Range and bearing in true bearing.
Auto, Manual Auto
TX Sector
Blanking
Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which shows area where no echoes are transmitted. To set sector, select
ON, then enter range. Max. sector is 135°. Dashed lines mark the dead sector. Note that noise may occasionally appear in the TX sector when the echo trail feature is turned on.
On, Off Off
Noise
Rejection
Dead sector
Electrical noise, appearing on the screen as “speckles,” may be suppressed with the noise rejector.
Note that some forms of interference cannot be suppressed.
Off, Low, High
(Con’t on next page)
Low
5-4
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings Setting
Background
Color
Echo Color Chooses echo color. Yellow, Green,
Multi-color.
(Multi-color shows echoes in red, yellow or green in order of descending strength.)
On, Off 2ND Echo
Rejection
Reduces second-trace echoes. See the paragraph “2.24 Suppressing
Second-trace Echoes.”
Watchman
Time
Sets watchman stand-by period.
For further details see the paragraph “ 2.23 Watchman.”
5, 10, 20 minutes
Range Unit Select unit of range measurement. nm, km, sm
Trail Mode
Chooses colors of background, range rings and characters.
Effective when HUE soft key is set for MANUAL.
Sets echo trail reference.
Note: Relative trail is available in all presentation modes except true motion. True trail is available in all modes.
Black/Green
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Black/Red
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
Blue/White
Background: Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
DK Blue/White
Background: Dark
Blue
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
White/Green
Background: White
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
True: input.
Echo trails plotted in actual courses and speeds.
Requires compass signal and speed
Relative: Echo trails move relative to own ship.
Black/Green
Green
Off
5 minutes nm
Relative
5-5
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE
SETUP menu. After choosing the ranges desired, change the range with the
[RANGE] key to activate range settings. Available ranges depends on the radar used.
At least two ranges must be turned on. When less than two ranges are turned on you cannot escape from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
Note that this function is not available with the GD-1900C.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE
SETUP menu.
3nm
4nm
6nm
8nm
12nm
16nm
24nm
36nm
48nm
64nm
72nm
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
1nm
1.5nm
2nm
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm *
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
RANGE
SETUP
ON/OFF
RETURN
6km
8km
12km
16km
24km
36km
48km
64km
72km
0.25km
0.5km
0.75km
1km
1.5km
2km
3km
4km
MAXIMUM RANGE XXkm *
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.
Range unit: nm Range unit: km
RANGE
SETUP
ON/OFF
RETURN
Radar range setup menu
3. Use the trackball to select the range which you want to turn on or off.
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn a range on or off as appropriate.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to register settings.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1823C 24 nm, km, sm
1833C 36 nm, km, sm
1933C 48 nm, km, sm
1943C 64 nm, km, sm
1953C 72 nm, km, sm
5-6
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.2.3 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default radar function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key
1
2
3
4
Default Function
Turn heading line off.
Turn range rings on/off.
Turn echo trail on/off.
Function Key Label
HL
RNG
TRL
Turn display offcenter on/off. SFT
RSR
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
Function key setting
Function key label
SOFT KEY 1
HL: HDG LINE OFF
SOFT KEY 2
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
H
L
R
N
G
FUNC
KEY
EDIT
SOFT KEY 3
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
T
R
L
SOFT KEY 4
SFT: OFFCENTER
S
F
T
RETURN
SOFT KEY 5
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
R
S
R
Radar function key menu
3. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1 SOFT KEY 1 SOFT KEY 1
▲
▲
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
Scroll down
SFT: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
VRM: VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
Scroll down
ACQ: ACQUISITION
TX: STBY/TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
▲ ▲
Radar function key options
5-7
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
4. Select function desired with the trackball, then press the ENTER soft key or
[ENTER] knob to register your selection.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Radar function keys
Menu Item
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
SFT: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
VRM: VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
ACQ: ACQUISITION
TX: STBY/TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Function
Assigns no function.
Turns heading line off.
Selects presentation mode.
Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window.
Shows A/C SEA adjustment window.
Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window.
Displays FTC window. Available with Model 1700 series radar. Inoperative otherwise.
Turns echo stretch on/off.
Sets pulselength (long or short).
Turns zoom on/off.
Press to shift display center to cursor location.
Press again to turn shift off and return cursor to display center.
Starts/stops echo trails.
Turns range rings on/off.
Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to navigator.
Displays alarm soft keys.
Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with each press.
Switches control between VRM1 and VRM2 with each press.
Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) display on/off.
Turns waypoint marker on/off.
Turns watchman on/off.
Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.
(Requires ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series network radar.)
Toggles between standby and transmit
Selects source for radar picture.
Turns data boxes on/off.
Function Key
Label
—
HL
MOD
GAI
SEA
RAI
FTC
ES
PLS
ZOM
SFT
TRL
RNG
TLL
ALM
EBL
VRM
TTM
WMK
WTM
ACQ
TX
RSR
DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Changes display control in combination display. CHG
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
5-8
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter display.
Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the
PLOTTER SETUP menu.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the [MENU] key open the main menu.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
WAYPOINT SWITCHING ARRVL ALM CRCL
COURSE VECTOR LINE
SET GOTO METHOD 1POINT
PLOTTER
SETUP
EDIT
D. BOX
RETURN
Plotter setup menu
Contents of plotter setup menu
Waypoint
Switching
Course
Vector
Set GOTO
Method
D. BOX
(soft key)
Chooses waypoint switching method.
See “switching waypoints” on page
3-50.
You may extend a line from the own ship position to show ship’s course. It may be a vector (length depends on ship’s speed) or a simple line (course bar).
Perpendicular,
Arrvl Alm Crcl,
Manual
Line, Vector, Off
Sets the method by which to navigate to a quick point. See “3.10.1 Navigating to a quick point.”
Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 5.5.
1 Point, 35 Points,
35 Pts/Port
Service
Perpendicular
Line
1 Point
5-9
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.3.2 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default plotter function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
1
Default Function
Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track.
Function Key
Label
TRK
EML
RUL 3
4
5
Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points).
Add new waypoint.
Alphanumeric waypoint list.
ADD
APL
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
Function key setting
Function key label
SOFT KEY 1
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 2
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
SOFT KEY 3
RUL: RULER
SOFT KEY 4
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
SOFT KEY 5
ALP: ALPHA LIST
A
L
P
A
D
D
R
U
L
E
M
L
T
R
K
FUNC
KEY
EDIT
RETURN
Plotter function key menu
3. Select the soft key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key. A menu shows the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.
SOFT KEY 1
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRK
▲
Scroll
ALP: ALPHA LIST
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Plotter function key options
5-10
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
4. Select function desired with the trackball, then press the ENTER soft key or
[ENTER] knob to register your selection.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Plotter function keys
Menu Item Function
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
Assigns no function.
Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place cursor for waypoint location, then press function key.
Moves selected waypoint to different position.
Select waypoint, press function key, select new position, then press the [ENTER] knob.
Measures range and bearing between two points.
Press START POINT soft key to change starting point if necessary. Range and bearing between two points appears at the top of the screen.
Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter waypoint name in window, then press the ENTER soft key.
Specify route to follow. Enter route name in window, then press the ENTER soft key.
Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate soft key to access menu item.
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK
ALP: ALPHA LIST
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
Each press starts or stops recording/plotting own ship’s track.
Turns TTM (target track) display on/off.
Erases all TTM track.
Displays waypoint alphanumeric list.
Displays waypoint local list.
Displays route list.
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Shows/hides data boxes.
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Changes control in combination screen.
Function Key
Label
—
ADD
MWP
RUL
GWP
GRT
EML
TRK
TTM
DTT
ALP
LCL
RTE
DBX
CHG
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
5-11
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart position to turning chart attributes on or off.
In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the position of the ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You can compensate for this error by offsetting chart position as shown in the procedure below.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART
SETUP and CHART OFFSET soft keys.
+
34
080
°
°
+ °
M CHART
OFFSET
16.0nm
SET
OFFSET
RESET
OFFSET
WP-002 FISH
RETURN
BRIDGE
Plotter display, chart offset selected
2. Use the trackball to place the cursor at the correct latitude and longitude position of own ship.
3. Press the SET OFFSET soft key.
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” ( ) appears at the top of the display.
To cancel chart offset, press the RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above procedure.
5-12
5.4.2 FURUNO, ™ chart attributes
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
FURUNO, NavCharts ™ chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART
DETAILS menu, which you may display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
LAT/LON GRID
TEXT INFORMATION
GREEN
ON
WAYPOINTS
WAYPOINT NAMES
LARGE
ON
CHART BORDER LINES ON
LANDMASS BRT YELLOW
BACKGROUND
NAVAIDS
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
OTHER SYMBOLS
MARKS SIZE
BLACK
ON
ON
WHITE
LARGE
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
Chart details menu (FURUNO, NavCharts ™)
5-13
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart details menu (FURUNO, NavCharts ™)
Item Description Settings Default
Lat/Lon Grid Latitude and longitude grids
Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white, Off
Green
Geographic place, name On, Off On Text
Information
Waypoints Waypoint size
Waypoint name
Large, Small, Off
On, Off
Large
On Waypoint
Names
Chart Border
Lines
Border lines (indices) On, Off On
Brt, Yellow Landmass Landmass color, brightness Bright, Dim: Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white.
Off
Background Chart background color White, Black
Navaids Navaids data on
NavCharts™; lighthouse data on FURUNO charts
On, Off
Lighthouse viewing sector On, Off Light Sector
Info
Other
Symbols
Marks Size
CNTOUR
LINE soft key
(See next page.)
Other map symbols
Marks size
Depth < 10 m
Depth = 10 m
Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white, Off
Large, Small
On, off, red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white
Depth > 10 m
On, off, red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white
On, off, red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white
Black
On
On
White
Large
On, Red
On, Yellow
On, Light-blue
Depth Info On, off, red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue, white
On, Red
5-14
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CNTOUR LINE soft key
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the CNTOUR LINE soft key.
CONTOUR
LINE
DEPTH < 10m
DEPTH = 10m
DEPTH > 10m
DEPTH INFORMATION
RED
YELLOW
LIGHT BLUE
RED
EDIT
10m = APPROX. 30ft
OR 5fa OR 6pb
RETURN
Contour line menu (FURUNO, NavCharts ™)
5.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes
C-MAP chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
CHART
DETAILS
CHART
DETAILS
WAYPOINT
WAYPOINT NAME
LAT/LON GRID
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART BORDER LINE PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BACKGROUND COLOR BLACK
PORT & SERVICE PLOTTER/OVERLAY
ATTENTION AREA
NAV LANE
LIGHT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BUOY & BEACON
SIGNAL
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT PLOTTER/OVERLAY
EDIT
DEPTH
INFO
NEXT
PAGE
PLACE NAME
COMPASS
TIDE & CURRENT
NATURAL FEATURE
RIVER & LAKE
CULTURAL FEATURE
LANDMARK
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART GENERATION
NEW OBJECT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON MULTIPLE
INFORMATION LEVEL BASIC
EDIT
DEPTH
INFO
RETURN
PREV.
PAGE
Page 1 Page 2
Chart details menu (C-MAP)
5-15
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart details menu (C-MAP)
Item Description
Waypoint
Waypoint
Name
Waypoint display
Waypoint name
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay
Lat/Lon Grid Latitude and longitude grids Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay Chart Border
Line
Background
Color
Port &
Service
Attention
Area
Nav Lane
Border lines
(indices)
Chart background color
Port services icon display
White, Black
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off
Attention area icon display Plotter/Overlay, Plotter
Navigation lanes
Plotter/Contour, Off
Black
Plotter
Plotter/Contour
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter
Light Lighthouse icon, sector Plotter/Overlay, Plot/No
Sector, Off
Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay Buoy &
Beacon
Signal
Compass
Tide &
Current
Buoys, beacons display
Signals category icon
Cartographic
Object
Cartographic objects category icon
Place Name Geographic names
Compass category icons
Tide display
Natural
Feature
Land outline
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off
Plotter
Plotter/Overlay
River & Lake Rivers and lakes
Cultural
Feature
Cultural features icons
Landmark
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay
Landmarks category icons Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
Chart
Generation
Chart generation category icons
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
New Object New object category icons Plotter/Overlay, Plotter, Off Plotter/Overlay
Complex
Object Icon
Information
Level
Single or multiple icon for object composed of several icons
Basic or detailed data for objects
Multiple, Single
Basic, Detailed
Multiple
Basic
(Con’t on next page)
5-16
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart details menu for C-MAP (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings Default
DEPTH INFO soft key
(See below.)
Bathymetric Line
Spot Sounding
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter,
Off
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter,
Off
Plotter/Overlay
Plotter/Overlay
Bottom Type Plotter/Overlay
Depth Area Limit
Bathymetric Range
Plotter/Overlay, Plotter,
Off
0-99999 ft
(m, fa, P/B)
0-99999 ft
(m, fa, P/B)
20,164 ft (6, 50 m, 3, 27 fa,
4, 30 P/B)
0-33 ft (0-10 m, 0-6 fa,
0-6 P/B)
Settings description
Basic: Shows basic characteristics of objects.
Detailed: Shows detailed characteristics of objects.
Multiple : Shows multiple icons for complex objects.
Off: Turns item off.
On: Turns item on.
Plotter: Shows item on plotter display.
Plot/No Sector: Shows item on plotter display. Sector not shown.
Plotter/Contour: Shows contour on plotter display.
Plotter/Overlay: Shows item on plotter and overlay displays.
Single : Shows single icon for complex objects.
DEPTH INFO soft key
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the DEPTH INFO soft key.
DEPTH
INFO
BATHYMETRIC LINE PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SPOT SOUNDING PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BOTTOM TYPE PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH AREA LIMIT 00020, 00164ft
BATHYMETRIC RANGE 00000-00033ft
EDIT
RETURN
Depth info menu (C-MAP)
5-17
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.5 Data Boxes Setup
You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and sounder displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and two for large size data box.
1. Display the radar, plotter or sounder display, whichever you want to set.
2. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected at step 1.
Plotter mode: PLOTTER SETUP, D. BOX
Radar mode:
RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, D. BOX
Sounder mode: SOUNDER MENU, D. BOX
DATA BOX SIZE
POSITION
WAYPOINT
COG
SOG
STW
BEARING
RANGE
TIME TO GO
ETA
TEMPERATURE
DEPTH
TRIP LOG
DATE
TIME
WIND
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
SMALL
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DATA
BOX
EDIT
RETURN
Data box menu
4. Use the trackball to select an item, then press the EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection. Six items may be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-18
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.6 Hot Page Setup
Six user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired display. If the default hot pages are not to your liking you may change them as shown below.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by pressing the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION,
SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and HOT PAGE SETUP soft keys in that order.
2. Use the trackball to select the hot page number to set, then press the EDIT soft key. The “SELECT SCREEN TYPE” window appears.
HOT PAGE 1
HOTPAGE
SETUP
HOT PAGE 2
HOT PAGE 3 3
SELECT SCREEN TYPE
FULL SCREEN
HOT PAGE 4 4 SPLIT x 2
HOT PAGE 5 5
SPLIT x 3
ENTER
CANCEL
HOT PAGE 6
Hot page setup menu
3. Use the trackball to select screen type desired among FULL SCREEN, SPLIT
X 2 and SPLIT X 3 and push the [ENTER] knob.
For the full-screen display, rotate the [ENTER] knob to select screen desired, then press the [ENTER] knob. If you selected a split screen, for example,
SPLIT X 3, the display now looks as in the figure below.
HOT PAGE 1
RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER
Red cursor shows current screen selection
NAV DATA OVERLAY
Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, main screen selection
5-19
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
4. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select a main screen, then press the [ENTER] knob. For example, select the radar display. Your choice is then marked with an “X” to show that is has been selected.
HOT PAGE 1
RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER
Sub screen
COMPASS HIGHWAY EXT VIDEO
Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, sub screen selection
5. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the screen to show at the top right 1/4 screen, then press the [ENTER] knob or the ENTER soft key.
6. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the screen to show at the bottom right 1/4 screen, then press [ENTER] knob or the ENTER soft key.
Note: The SELECT WINDOW soft key functions to select the window to process.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-20
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of navigator connected to your plotter.
5.7.1 Navigation data source
The NAV
SETUP menu mainly selects the source of nav data. For
GPS receiver other than the
POSITION SOURCEALL
SPEED AVERAGING* 0060second(s)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET* +00:00
TEMP CALIBRATION 00
°
F
DEPTH CALIBRATION 00ft
NAV
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
* For GPS receiver other
than GP-310B/320B.
GP-310B/320B, speed averaging and local time
Nav setup menu offset (to use local time) are also available. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and NAV SOURCE SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.
Contents of nav setup menu
Item
Position
Source
Speed
Averaging
Local Time
Offset
Chooses source of position data. FURUNO BB GPS: GPS
Receiver GP-310B/320B
GP: GPS navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
LC: Loran C navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
ALL: Multiple navaid connection
(via NETWORK or NMEA port)
0-9999 seconds Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s speed over a given period. If the period is too long or too short, calculation error will result. Change this setting if calculation error occurs. The default setting is suitable for most conditions.
GPS uses UTC time. If you would rather use local time, enter the time difference between it and UTC. This setting is not necessary when the time difference is entered at the
GPS navaid which is connected. Use the +
<- -> - soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa.
-13:30 to +13:30 hours
Offsets NMEA water temperature data. -40°F - 40°F Temp
Calibration
Depth
Calibration
Offsets NMEA depth data. -15 - +90 ft
Default
Setting
ALL
60 seconds
00:00
0°F
0 ft
5-21
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.7.2 GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B)
The GPS SETUP menu sets up the GPS Receiver GPS-310B/320B. Press the
[MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and
GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.
GPS
SETUP
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
GEODETIC DATUM
POSITION SMOOTHING
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING
+00:00
WGS-84
000 second (s)
005 second (s)
GPS SPEED AVERAGING 060 second (s)
LATITUDE OFFSET 0.000’N
LONGITUDE OFFSET
DISABLE SATELLITE
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
ANTENNA HEIGHT
GPS FIX MODE
COLD START
0.000’E
- - - - - -
45
°
35.000’N
125
°
00.000’W
005 m
2D/3D
NO
EDIT
GPS
STATUS
WAAS
SET UP
RETURN
Appears only when
GPS-320B is connected.
GPS setup menu
Contents of GPS setup menu
Local Time
Offset
GPS uses UTC time. If you would rather use local time, enter the time difference between it and UTC. Use the +< - ->- soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa.
Geodetic Datum Geodetic datum is a reference for geodetic survey measurements consisting of fixed latitude, longitude and azimuth values associated with a defined station of reference. You must have the correct geodetic datum selected in your plotter so that it will reference the correct point on the chart for a given latitude and longitude. Although WGS-84 is now the world standard, other categories of charts still exist. Refer to Appendix for a full list of geodetic datum.
(Con’t on next page)
-13:30 to +13:30 hours
See Appendix for full list.
00:00
WGS-84
5-22
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Position
Smoothing
Spd/Cse
Smoothing
GPS
Speed
Averaging
Latitude,
Longitude
Offset
When the DOP or receiving condition is unfavorable, the GPS fix may change greatly, even if the vessel is not moving. This change can be reduced by smoothing the raw GPS fixes. A setting between 000 to 999 is available. The higher the setting the more smoothed the raw data. If the setting is too high, the response time required to show a change of latitude and longitude will be too long. This is especially noticeable if the vessel is moving fast. Increase the setting if the GPS fix changes randomly.
During position fixing, ship’s velocity (speed and course) is directly measured by receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw velocity data may vary too much depending on receiving conditions and other factors. You can reduce this random variance by increasing the smoothing. The higher the smoothing setting, the more the raw data will be averaged. If this setting is high, the response to speed and course changes will slow. For no smoothing, enter all zeroes.
Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s speed over a given period. If the period is too long or too short, calculation error will result.
Change this setting if calculation error occurs.
The default setting is suitable for most conditions.
Offsets latitude position to further refine position accuracy.
0-999 seconds 0 seconds (no position smoothing)
0-999 seconds 5 seconds
0-999 seconds 60 seconds
0.001’S –
9.999’N
0.001’E –
9.999’W
0.0’ (no offset)
(Con’t on next page)
5-23
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Disable
Satellite
Latitude
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting abnormal satellite number(s) in its Almanac, which contains general orbital data about all
GPS satellites, including those which are malfunctioning. Using this information, the
GPS receiver automatically eliminates any malfunctioning satellite from the GPS satellite schedule. However, the Almanac sometimes may not contain this information.
If you hear about a malfunctioning satellite from another source, you can disable it manually. Enter satellite number (two digits, max. 3 satellites),then press the ENTER soft key.
Sets initial latitude position after cold start.
Use the N < - -> S soft key to switch coordinate.
Longitude Sets initial longitude position after cold start.
Use the W < - -> E soft key to switch coordinate.
Max. 3 satellites None
— 45°35.000’N
— 125°00.000’W
Antenna
Height
GPS Fix
Mode
Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit above sea surface. For further details refer to the installation manual.
Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four satellites in view whichever is greater).
Cold Start Clears the Almanac to receive the latest
Almanac.
GPS
STATUS
(soft key)
0-99 m
2D, 2D/3D
No, Yes
5 m
2D/3D
No
Displays GPS satellite status display. Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or
GPS navigator outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV. For further details see the chapter on Maintenance.
5-24
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
WAAS SETUP
Press the WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.
Note: This function requires GP-320B antenna.
Contents of WAAS SETUP menu
WAAS MODE Select ON to use the WAAS mode.
WAAS SEARCH WAAS satellite can be searched automatically or manually. For manual search, enter appropriate WAASsatellite number.
WAAS ALARM When the WAAS signal is lost, the audible alarm sounds with the visual message “NO
WAAS SIGNAL.”
On: Alarm continues to sound until the
WAAS positioning mode is available again or the alarm is recognized by key operation.
Off: Alarm sounds three times.
On, Off Off
Auto, Manual Auto
On, Off Off
CORRECTION
DATA SET
Selects the type of message for WAAS correction. Use “02 (default setting)” until the system becomes operational.
00 to 27, 99 02
5-25
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.7.3 TD display setup
The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD position. (Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to display TD position.)
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and TD SETUP soft keys to display the TD SETUP menu.
TD
SETUP
LORAN-C
GRI 9940 11-27
U.S. WEST COAST
CORRECTION 1
CORRECTION 2
+000.0
µ s
+000.0 µ s
EDIT
DECCA
CHAIN 01 R-G
S BALTIC
CORRECTION 1
CORRECTION 2
+00.00 lane
+00.00 lane
RETURN
TD setup menu
Displaying Loran C TDs
1. Select GRI, then press the EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair window.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▲
9940
▼
11-27
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran GRI & station pair window
2. Adjust the trackball upward or downward to select GRI code.
3. Roll the trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station pair.
GRI & STATION PAIR
9940
▲
11-27
▼
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran C GRI & station pair window
4. Adjust the trackball vertically to select station pair.
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
5-26
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position accuracy. Select (GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the
EDIT soft key. Enter correction value with the trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the + < − −> - soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa.
Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Displaying DECCA TDs
1. Select CHAIN, then press the EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair window.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
▲
01
▼
R-G
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window
2. Adjust the trackball upward or downward to select Decca chain number.
3. Roll the trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station pair.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
01
▲
R-G
▼
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window
4. Adjust the trackball upward or downward to select station pair (R: red, G: green and P: purple).
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select
(CHAIN) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the EDIT soft key.
Enter correction value with the trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the
+ < − −> - soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the
ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
5-27
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.8 Nav Data Display Setup
The nav data display shows various navigation data, fed from a navigator, network equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display it as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV
DISP SETUP and NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
DATA
1 POSITION
EDIT
2 WPT POS 3 SOG
4 STW 5 COG
6 BEARING 7 RANGE
8 DEPTH 9 TEMP
RETURN
Nav data setup screen
3. Use the trackball to select a location.
4. Press the EDIT soft key. The following display appears.
DISPLAY DATA
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¤
¡
¡
¡
POSITION
WPT POSITION
SOG
STW
COG
BEARING
RANGE
DEPTH
TEMPERATURE
LOG TRIP
TIME TO GO
ETA
DATE
TIME
WIND
Nav data setup window
5. Select the data to display, then press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
6. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-28
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This section shows you how to customize your network sounder to your liking.
You can set fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensors, etc.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
SYSTEM
SETUP
FISH ALARM LEVEL
TRANSMISSION
TVG 200 kHz
TVG 50k Hz
ECHO OFFSET 200 kHz
ECHO OFFSET 50 kHz
BOTTOM LEVEL 200 kHz
BOTTOM LEVEL 50 kHz
KP PULSE
SMOOTHING
TLL OUTPUT
MEDIUM
ON
3
3
+00
+00
+000
+000
INTERNAL
SM3
ON
EDIT
SENSOR
SETUP
RETURN
Sounder system setup menu
Sounder system setup menu description
Item Description
Fish Alarm
Level
Sets the fish alarm sensitivity; that is, the minimum echo strength which will trigger the fish alarms.
High: Orange and stronger echoes trigger the alarm.*
Medium: Yellow and stronger echoes trigger the alarm.*
Low: Green and stronger echoes trigger the alarm.*
* = 8-color display
Transmission Turns TX power on/off. On, Off
Low
On
(Continued on next page)
5-29
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings
Setting
TVG
(50 kHz, 200 kHz)
TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates for propagation attenuation of the ultrasonic waves. It does this by equalizing echo presentation so that fish schools of the same size appear in the same density in both shallow and deep waters. In addition, it reduces surface noise. Note that if the TVG level is set too high short range echoes may not be displayed.
0-9 3 (both 50 kHz and 200 kHz)
Echo Offset
(50 kHz, 200 kHz)
-50 - +50 0 (both 50 kHz and 200 kHz)
Bottom Level
(50 kHz,
200 kHz)
KP Pulse
If the on-screen echo level appears to be too weak or too strong and the level cannot be adjusted satisfactorily with the gain control, adjust echo offset to compensate for too weak or too strong echoes.
If the depth indication is unstable in automatic operation or the bottom echo cannot be displayed in reddish-brown by adjusting the gain control in manual operation, you may adjust the bottom echo level detection circuit, for both 50 kHz and 200 kHz, to stabilize the indication. Note that if the level is set too low weak echoes may be missed and if set too high the depth indication will not be displayed.
Selects source of keying pulse.
-100 - +100 0 (both 50 kHz and 200 kHz)
Internal
Smoothing
Internal, External
(See installation manual.)
SM1-SM4, OFF SM3
TLL Output
SENSOR
SETUP soft key
(See next page.)
Smoothes echoes to present stable display. The higher the setting the greater the smoothing.
Outputs current position to plotter where it is marked with TLL mark.
Use soft key to output TLL.
Offsets speed, depth and water temperature indications and speed of sound.
ON, OFF ON
See next section for details.
5-30
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
The SENSOR SETUP menu lets you further refine speed, water temperature and depth data fed from the network sounder.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and SENSOR SETUP soft keys to show the SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water temperature, depth and speed of sound are shown at the bottom of the menu.
SENSOR
SETUP
SPEED CALIBRATION
TEMP. CALIBRATION
DEPTH CALIBRATION
+ 00%
+ 00
°
F
+00ft
ASCTC SPD CALIBRATION + 000m/s
EDIT
SPEED
12.3kt
DEPTH
125.0ft
TEMP
78.8
° F
ACSTC SPD
1500m/s
RETURN
Sensor setup menu
3. Select item to adjust, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Adjust the trackball upward or downward to set appropriate value.
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For example, if the water temperature readout is 77 ° F but the actual water temperature is 75 ° F, enter –2( ° F).
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance between ship’s draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set ship’s draft here. Enter a plus or minus value.
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network sounder. Normally no adjustment is required, however if echoes are returning too slow or too fast adjust the value as appropriate. This is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level. Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.
Sensor setup menu settings
Speed Calibration
Temperature Calibration
-50 -+50%
-40°F – +40°F
Depth Calibration -15 - +90 ft
Acoustic Speed Calibration -500 - +500 m/s
0 (no offset)
0 (no offset)
0 (no offset)
0 (no offset)
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key.
5-31
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range
This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom range (marker and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges are restored whenever the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore, change the depth unit before changing the basic ranges.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER
RANGE SETUP menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RANGE 1
RANGE 2
RANGE 3
RANGE 4
RANGE 5
RANGE 6
RANGE 7
RANGE 8
ZOOM RANGE
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE
15 ft
30 ft
60 ft
120 ft
200 ft
400 ft
1000 ft
4000 ft
30 ft
20 ft
EDIT
RETURN
Sounder range setup menu
3. Select the range to change, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Rotate the trackball or [ENTER] knob to set range desired, then press the
RETURN soft key. For basic range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range cannot be higher than its succeeding neighbor.
5. Press the [MENU] key to finish.
Default basic ranges
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8
5 m
15 ft
10 m
30 ft
20 m
60 ft
40 m
120 ft
80 m
200 ft
150 m
400 ft
300 m
1000 ft
1200 m
4000 ft
3 fa
3 P/B
5 fa
5 P/B
10 fa
10 P/B
20 fa
30 P/B
40 fa
50 P/B
80 fa 150 fa
100 P/B 200 P/B
650 fa
700 P/B
Setting range: 2 m –1200 m, 7 ft – 4000 ft, 2 fa – 650 fa, 1 P/B – 1000 P/B
Zoom range and bottom-lock ranges
Zoom Range
Bottom-lock
Range
2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 P/B – 70 P/B
3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft, 2 or 3 fa, 2 or 3 P/B
10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 P/B
6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 P/B
5-32
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.9.4 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default sounder function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
1
3
5
Default Function Function Key
Label
Output current position .
TLL
CLT
Erase weak signal.
Set picture advancement speed.
SLV
NL
PA
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Show the sounder display.
2. Press the [MENU] key.
3. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
Function key setting
Function key label
SOFT KEY 1
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
SOFTKEY 2
CLT: CLUTTER
C
L
T
T
L
L
FUNC
KEY
EDIT
SOFT KEY 3
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
S
L
V
SOFT KEY 4
NL: NOISE LIMITER
N
L
RETURN
SOFT KEY 5
PA: PICTURE ADV
P
A
Sounder function key menu
4. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1 SOFT KEY 1 SOFT KEY 1
▲
▲
OFF
MOD: AUTO MODE
G20: GAIN 200 kHz
G5: GAIN 50 kHz
SFT: SHIFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER
CLT: CLUTTER
WMK: WHITE MARKER
HUE: HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
Scroll down
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TV2: TVG 200 kHz
TV5: TVG 50 kHz
EO2: OFFSET 200K
EO5: OFFSET 50K
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
▲
Scroll down
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Sounder function key options
5-33
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5. Select function desired with the trackball, then press the ENTER soft key or
[ENTER] knob to register your selection.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Sounder function keys
Menu Item Function
Function Key
Label
OFF
MOD: AUTO MODE
G20: GAIN 200 kHz
G5: GAIN 50 kHz
SFT: SHIFT
Assigns no function.
Display automatic mode selection window.
Displays 200 kHz gain adjustment window.
Displays 50 kHz gain adjustment window.
Shifts range in manual operation.
NL: NOISE LIMITER
CLT: CLUTTER
Suppresses noise.
Suppresses clutter.
WMK: WHITE MARKER Sets white marker.
HUE: HUE Sets hue.
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL Erases weak signals.
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TV2: TVG 200 kHz
TV5: TVG 50 kHz
E02: OFFSET 200K
E05: OFFSET 50K
Sets picture advance speed.
Turns temperature graph on/off.
Sets TVG for 200 kHz.
Sets TVG for 50 kHz.
Offsets echo strength for 200 kHz.
Offsets echo strength for 500 kHz.
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
Sets echo smoothing rate.
Sets zoom range.
Sets bottom lock range for bottom-lock display.
TLL: TLL OUTPUT Outputs current position to plotter. Also inscribes line on sounder and registers position as a waypoint on plotter.
Selects source for sounder data. SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Turns data boxes on/off.
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Switches control in combination display.
TLL
SSR
DBX
CHG
Note:
To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
PA
TG
TV2
TV5
EO2
EO5
MOD
G20
G5
SFT
NL
CLT
WMK
HUE
SLV
SMZ
ZMR
BLR
5-34
6. DATA TRANSFER
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from memory cards, uploading and downloading data, loading waypoint data from
Yeoman, and outputting data through the network.
6.1 Memory Card Operations
The memory cards store these data: marks, lines, waypoints, routes, track, and setting data (plotter only).
Before you can use a memory card it must be formatted. This prepares the card for use with the system. Note that formatting a memory card erases all data from the card.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.
SAVE
DATA TRACKS
MARKS & LINES
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
SETTING DATA
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EDIT
SAVE
FORMAT
RETURN
Save data menu
3. Press the FORMAT soft key. You are asked if you are ready to format the memory card.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to format (or press the [CLEAR] key to escape).
“NOW FORMATTING MEMORY CARD” appears. Do not remove the card while it is being formatting. When the formatting is completed, “FORMAT
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED TO
FORMAT MEMORY CARD.” appears.
6-1
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CONFIGURATION, DATA
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.
SAVE
DATA TRACKS
MARKS & LINES
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
SETTING DATA*
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EDIT
SAVE
* = Plotter data only
FORMAT
RETURN
Save data menu
3. Use the trackball to select item to save.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the trackball to select ON.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.
8. Press the SAVE soft key, then press the [ENTER] knob. The message “NOW
SAVING DATA TO MEMORY CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF DISPLAY UNIT
UNTIL COMPLETED.” appears.
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB
TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
6-2
6. DATA TRANSFER
Memory card messages
Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related error. These are tabulated below.
Memory card messages
Message Reason
Memory card is not inserted. Please insert memory card. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Memory card not inserted.
Remedy
Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display and then insert card.
Memory card is not formatted. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Wrong card is inserted.
Please insert correct memory card. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Overwrite data?
(Track)
(Mark)
(WPT)
(Config)
Unformatted memory card.
Chart card inserted instead of memory card.
Data type to be recorded exists on memory card. (Two or more of same type of data cannot be recorded.)
Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display. Format the card referring to page 6-1.
Remove chart card, insert memory card, and then push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
Push the [ENTER] knob to overwrite same data type on the card, or press the
[CLEAR] key to escape.
6-3
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card
Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from a memory card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing past data and setting up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setting data.”
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and
DATA TRANSFER soft keys.
2. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
3. Press the LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD
DATA menu.
LOAD
DATA TRACKS
MARKS & LINES
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
SETTING DATA*
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
EDIT
LOAD
* = Plotter data only
RETURN
6-4
Load data menu
4. Use the trackball to select item to load.
5. Press the EDIT soft key. (The EDIT soft key is inoperative when no memory card is inserted or there is no data in the memory card.)
6. Use the trackball to select ON. (Select OFF to not load selected data.) Press the ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item selected, the unit beeps and ON cannot be selected.
7. After selecting all items desired, press the LOAD soft key, then press the
[ENTER] knob. The message “START LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA.
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
Notes on loading data
Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be erased when the track memory capacity is exceeded.
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data replaces like stored data.
Marks & lines : The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line memory becomes full no marks may be entered.
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the memory card contents could not be loaded, push the [ENTER] knob to restart with default settings. Note that track memory capacity is not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data, turn the power off and on again.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data
You can upload/download waypoints, routes, marks and lines from/to a PC, through the DATA 4 port at the rear of the display unit. Note that radar and sounder data cannot be uploaded or downloaded.
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the PC
The communication format (RS-232C) with the PC is as follows:
Baud Rate: 4800 bps
Character Length: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1 bit
Parity: None
X Control: XON/XOFF (fixed)
The following data can be downloaded/uploaded between a PC and this equipment:
•
•
•
Waypoint data (In alphanumeric order)
Route data (In order of route number)
End of sentence
Note 1: There are two kinds of data for route data: route data and route comment data.
Note 2: DGPS position fix is not available when uploading or downloading data.
Note 3: Wiring information appears on the UPLOAD or DOWNLOAD menu.
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data
1. Connect the PC to the equipment.
2. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
3. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
4. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
5. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
6. Press the DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC or UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE
FROM PC soft key.
WAYPOINT & ROUTES OFF
MARKS & LINES
RS232C SETTING
OFF
• 4800BPS,
• 8BIT,
•1STOP BIT,
• PARITY NONE,
• CONTROL Xon/Xoff
WIRING INFORMATION
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD >2>-BLUE -<3<SD
RD-A >3>-YELLOW
RD-B >4>-GREEN
+12V >5>-RED
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK
GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
UPLOAD
EDIT
UPLOAD
SELECT
BPS
RETURN
WAYPOINT & ROUTES OFF
MARKS & LINES
RS232C SETTING
OFF
• 4800BPS,
• 8BIT,
•1STOP BIT,
• PARITY NONE,
• CONTROL Xon/Xoff
WIRING INFORMATION
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD >2>-BLUE -<3<SD
RD-A >3>-YELLOW
RD-B >4>-GREEN
+12V >5>-RED
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK
GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
DOWN-
LOAD
EDIT
DWLOAD
SELECT
BPS
RETURN
Upload and download menus
6-5
6. DATA TRANSFER
7. To change the baud rate, press the SELECT BPS soft key.
BAUD RATE
▲
¤
¡
¡
▼
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
Baud rate window
8. Select baud rate, then press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the DWLOAD or UPLOAD soft key. You are asked if you are ready to download or upload waypoints and routes.
10. Push the [ENTER] knob to download (upload).
Waypoint data format
PFEC, GPwpl, llll.llll, a, yyyyy.yyy, a, c----c, c, c----c, a <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Waypoint data format
1: Waypoint latitude
2: N/S
3: Waypoint longitude
4: E/W
5: Waypoint name (Number of characters is fixed to 6 and space code is placed when the number of characters are less than 6.)
6: Waypoint color
7: Waypoint comment (1 byte for mark code + 13 characters of comment.)
1st byte of mark code: Fixed to “@”.
2nd byte of mark code: Internal mark code. See Note 1.
8. Information of marking waypoint. Always set to “A”.
“V”: Not displayed
Note 1: The following characters can be used for comments:
_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789&'#
=9 =: =; =< = =
=>
=B
=?
=C
=@
=D
=A
=E
=F =G =H
Characters available for comment
6-6
6. DATA TRANSFER
Route data menu
$GPRTE, x, x, a, ccc, c----c, c----c, ... , c----c <CR><LF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 12
Route data format
1: Number of sentences required for one complete route data (1 to 4). See Note
2.
2: Number of sentences currently used (1 to 4)
3: Message mode (Always set to C)
4: Route No. (001 to 300, 3 digits required)
5 through 12: Waypoint name (Max. 8 names, length of each waypoint name is fixed to 7 byte)
Note 2: A route can may contain 35 waypoints, and the GPRTE sentence for one route data may exceed 80 byte limitation. In this case, route data is divided into several GPRTE sentences (Max. 4 sentences). This value shows the number of sentences the route data has been divided.
Route comment data format
$PFEC, GPrtc, xx, c----c <CR><LF>
1 2
Route comment format
1: Route No. (01 to 200, 3 digits required)
2: Route comment (Max. 16 characters, variable length)
The same characters of the comment for waypoint comment can be used.
End of sentence
$PFEC, GPxfr, CTL, E <CR><LF>
End of sentence
6-7
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman
Waypoint data can be loaded from a Yeoman to this equipment. Connect the
Yeoman to a DATA port on this equipment and then follow the procedure below.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION key.
3. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
4. Press the RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA soft key.
5. You are asked if you are sure to receive waypoint data from Yeoman equipment. Push the [ENTER] knob to receive the data.
The message “NOW RECEIVING YEOMAN DATA. PUSH SOFT KEY
‘STOP’ TO STOP RECEIVING.” Is displayed. If waypoint capacity is reached the message “WAYPOINTS FULL. NO MORE WAYPOINT CAN BE
RECEIVED. PUSH ANY KEY TO STOP.” appears.
6. To stop receiving, press the STOP soft key.
7. After waypoints have been received, press the [MENU] key.
6-8
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment
You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
4. Press the RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.
HOST NAME PLOT1 - - -
MARKS & LINES OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES OFF
RECEIVE
DATA
EDIT
RCV
RETURN
Receive data menu
5. Select HOST NAME, then press the EDIT soft key.
HOST NAME
P LOT1---
Host name window
6. Use the trackball and the alphanumeric keys to input host name from which to receive data, then push the [ENTER] knob.
7. Select the data you wish to receive, then press the EDIT soft key. For example, select MARKS & LINES.
MARKS & LINES
▲
¡
¤
▼
ON
OFF
Marks & lines window
8. Select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
9. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.
6-9
6. DATA TRANSFER
10. Press the RCV soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.
The message “START RECEIVING DATA VIA NETWORK.” is displayed. If no data could be found, the message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT FOUND.” appears.
11. When the transfer is completed, the message “DATA TRANSFER
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the
[ENTER] knob to finish.
12. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network
Follow the procedure below to output data through the network.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, PORT SETUP and OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.
SELECT SENTENCE
AAM
APB
BOD
BWR
DPT
GGA
GLL
GTD
MTW
RMA
RMB
RMC
VHW
VTG
WPL
XTE
ZDA
HDT
HDG
MWV
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SELECT
SNTNC
ON/OFF
RETURN
Select sentence menu
3. Select sentence with the trackball.
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.
5. Press the RETURN soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
6-10
7. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good working order and remedying simple problems.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can cause electrical shock exists inside the equipment. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.
Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance program should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below.
Maintenance program
Display unit connectors
LCD
Remedy
Check for tight connection.
Tighten loosened connectors.
The LCD will, in time, accumulate a coating of dust which tends to dim the picture. Wipe LCD lightly with soft cloth to remove dust.
Ground terminal
Check for tight connection and corrosion.
7.2 Replacement of Battery
Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching, using tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper frequently so the salt or dirt will not scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents such as thinner, acetone or benzene for cleaning.
Clean or replace ground wire as necessary.
A lithium battery (Type CR2450-F2 ST2L, Code No. 000-144-941) fitted on a circuit board inside the display unit preserves data when the equipment is turned off, and its life is about three years. When its voltage is low the battery icon ( ) appears at the top of the display. When the icon appears, contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.
7-1
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.3 Replacement of Fuse
The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the ship’s mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before replacing it. Use the correct fuse (15A for 12 V device, 7A for 24 V device). Using the wrong fuse will damage the equipment and void the warranty.
CAUTION
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or damage the equipment.
If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, you may need to clean the trackball.
1. Turn the retainer ring counterclockwise 45° to unlock it.
Retainer Ring
Display unit
2. Remove the retainer ring and ball.
3. Clean the ball with a soft lint-free cloth, and then blow carefully into the ball-cage to dislodge dust and lint.
4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.
5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
6. Replace the ball and retainer ring. Be sure the retainer ring is not inserted reversely.
Note: Trackball maintenance parts are available as below.
Part
Retainer ring and ball MU3721 000-144-645
7-2
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified technician.
7.5.1 General
General troubleshooting you cannot turn on the power
If… Then… there is no response
• check for blown fuse.
• check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
• check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
• check for damaged power cable.
• check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).
• turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may when a key is pressed be faulty. Request service.
7.5.2 Radar
GD-1900C requires a network radar.
Radar troubleshooting
If… But… Then… you pressed the nothing appears on the
• check that the antenna cable is
[POWER/BRILL] key and the
RADAR TX soft key to show display firmly fastened.
• check if radar source is correct.
the radar picture marks, legends appear no echo appears
• check Tx fuse in power cable. the picture is not updated or it freezes tuning is adjusted
— sensitivity is poor
If it is blown, replace it.
• check antenna cable.
• for freeze up, turn the display unit on and off again.
• magnetron may need to be the range is changed there is poor discrimination in radar picture does not change
— replaced. Contact your dealer.
• try to hit the [+] and [-] keys again.
• turn the display unit again .
• adjust A/C SEA.
off and on range the true motion presentation is not working properly the range rings are not displayed
—
—
• reselect true motion mode.
• check if heading and speed are input.
• hit the RADAR DISPLY and
RINGS soft keys to display them.
7-3
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5.3 Plotter
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B.
Plotter troubleshooting
If… Then… position is not fixed within three minutes
• check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.
• check number of satellites received, on the GPS status display. (See page 7-11.) There should be three or more. position is wrong
• check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS
SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
• enter position offset, on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu. the track is not plotted
• track is not being plotted. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.)
Press the TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL menu to start plotting again. the bearing is wrong
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs do not appear
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs are wrong
• check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL
SETUP menu.
• check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the
GENERAL SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca) chains codes are entered, on the TD SETUP menu.
• enter TD offset, on the TD SETUP menu. the ship’s speed indication is not zero after the ship is stopped
• try to decrease speed/course smoothing, on the GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS menu.
7-4
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5.4 Sounder
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N.
Sounder troubleshooting
If… But… Then… you selected a sounder display with the DISP key picture does not appear
• check that the network sounder’s signal cable is firmly fastened.
•
Check that sounder source is correct.
• check that the network sounder is p lugged in . The LED on the network sounder should flash every second. marks and characters appear the picture appears picture sensitivity is too low picture does not appear zero line does not appear
—
• check for loosened transducer connector.
• the picture is shifted. Confirm shift setting.
• check gain setting, if using manual operation.
• marine life or air bubbles may be clinging to transducer face.
• bottom may be too soft to return a suitable echo. the depth indication is not displayed noise or interference shows on the display the water temperature graph appears data is wrong
—
—
• adjust gain and range to display the bottom echo (in reddish brown), if you are using the manual sounder mode.
• check to be sure the transducer cable is not near ship’s engine.
• check the ground.
• other video sounders of the same frequency as yours may be operating near you.
• check that sensor cable is tightly fastened.
7-5
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.6 Diagnostics
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper operation. Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote controller test, and Test pattern.
7.6.1 Memory I/O test
The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the display unit, GPS
Receiver GP-310B/320B, Network Sounder ETR-6/10N and ARP, displaying program number and checking for proper operation.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.
MEMORY
I/O TST
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
RETURN
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model
1800/1900 series network radar.
MEMORY I/O TEST menu
6. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.
7-6
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Display unit test
Press the DISPLAY UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the display unit. The equipment displays program version number and checks devices. Results for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any
NG, request service. A test connector is required to check ports. “ - - “ shown when no test connector is connected. Chart number shown when chart is inserted. Press the RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
No results appear when
"sub" radar selected as radar source.
* = For FURUNO, NAVIONICS model. 19500010XX for C-MAP model.
Program No. 19500020XX*
ROM1, 2 : OK
ROM3
ROM4
SDRAM
SRAM
: OK
: OK
: OK
INT. BATT
PORT
: OK
: OK
NMEA IN/OUT 1 : - -
NMEA IN/OUT 2 : - -
NMEA IN : - -
RS232
HEADING
NETWORK
: - -
: 352.2
°
: - -
CARD SLOT
CHART NUMBER:
:
HEADING PULSE : OK
BEARING PULSE : OK (XX.Xrpm)
TOTAL ON TIME : 000000.0 h
TOTAL TX TIME : 000000.0 h
Program No. 19500020XX*
ROM1, 2
ROM3
ROM4
: OK
: OK
: OKS
SDRAM
SRAM
: OK
: OK
INTERNAL
BATTERY : OK
PORT
NMEA IN/OUT 1 : - -
NMEA IN/OUT 2 : - -
NMEA IN
RS232C
HEADING
: - -
: - -
: 352.2
°
NETWORK
CHART NUMBER:
: - -
Machine Status +130 Machine Status +130
XX = Program Version No.
XX = Program Version No.
Model 1800/1900 series GD-1900C
Display unit test results
GPS sensor test (Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B)
Press the GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B. The equipment displays GPS receiver program version number, and checks the GPS unit for proper operation, displaying OK or NG (No Good) as the result. For NG, request service. Press the
RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. *48502180XX
GPS UNIT : OK
Machine Status +115
*: This is for GPS-310B,
"48502380XX" appears for GPS-320B.
XX = Program Version No.
GPS receiver test results
7-7
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Network sounder test (Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N)
Press the NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N. The equipment displays network sounder program version number, checks the ROM and RAM, and displays water temperature (appropriate sensor required) and depth. The results of the
ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX
ROM1, 2 : OK
RAM : OK
TEMPERATURE : xxx.xx
°
F
DEPTH : xxx.xx m
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
Network sounder test results
ARP test (Requires ARP pcb in Model 1800/1900 series network radar)
The ARP test is mainly provided for the service technician. Press the ARP TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the ARP. The results of the
ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 18590271XX
ARP ROM : OK
ARP RAM
SPEED
COURSE
TRIGGER
: OK
: OK 12.3kt
: OK 359.9
°
: OK
VIDEO : OK
BEARING PULSE : OK
HEADING PULSE : OK
MINIMUM HIT : 0003
SCAN-TIME : 0250
MANUAL ACQ : 00
AUTO ACQ : 00
FE-DATA1
FE-DATA2
: 000
: 000
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ARP test results
7-8
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the TEST PATTERN soft key to show the test pattern.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob consecutively to show white, red, green, blue and black colors individually.
7. Press the RETURN soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
GREEN
RED
RETURN
[ENTER] knob
WHT
[ENTER] knob
RED
[ENTER] knob
GRN
BLU
[ENTER] knob
[ENTER] knob
BLK
[ENTER] knob
Test pattern sequence
7-9
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.6.3 Keyboard, remote controller test
The keyboard test checks the controls on the display unit and remote controller for proper operation.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.
PUSH "CLEAR" KEY
3 TIMES TO RETURN
K-BOARD
TEST
For Remote Controller For Display Unit
I/R REMOTE CODE
Screen for testing keyboard, remote controller
6. Operate each control on the keyboard and remote controller one by one. A key is functioning properly if its on-screen location “fills” in black when the key is pressed. For the [ENTER] knob and trackball, rotate them to show their X-Y positions digitally, and push the [ENTER] knob to confirm its function.
7. Press the [CLEAR] key three times on the display unit or remote controller to escape from the test.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
7-10
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.7 GPS Status Display
The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites. It is available with connection of the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or a GPS navigator outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
3. Press the GPS STATUS soft key.
DOP value
Date and
Time
WAAS satellite
(GPS-320B only)
23:59:59
APR 10 2001
DOP
ALT
W
N
12
23
W
29
20
01
21
05
30
27
17
26
28
S
SAT
No.
E
20
21
30
28
123
01
17
26
05
23
12
29
27
30
1.2
1 m
SNR
40 50
GPS 3D
RETURN
Estimated position of satellite in the sky.
Satellites used for fixing position are circled.
GPS position fix
GPS antenna height
Receive signal level
Bars show satellite signal levels. Satellites whose signal level extends past 40 are used to fix position.
WAAS satellite
(in three digits, GPS-320B only)
GPS status display
4. Press the RETURN soft key to quit the GPS status display.
7-11
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder sections. These memories can be cleared to restart operation with default settings.
The following data are not cleared: Radar; Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS level, tuning point, tuning indication (short, medium, long), video level, dead sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type, on time, tx time, Sounder; White marker, hue, signal level, TLL output, depth calibration, range.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the MEMORY CLEAR soft key.
DISPLAY UNIT NO
GPS SENSOR NO
NETWORK SOUNDER NO
MEMORY
CLEAR
EDIT
RETURN
Memory clear menu
6. Use the trackball to choose the memory to clear.
7. Press the EDIT soft key.
8. Use the trackball to select YES, then press the ENTER soft key. One of the following displays appears depending on the selection made at step 6.
ALL SETTNGS EXCEPT
SNDR ARE RESET TO
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
BEGIN COLD START
TO CLEAR GPS
MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
SOUNDER WILL BE
SET TO DEFAULT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Display Unit Clear GPS Receiver Clear Network Sounder Clear
Windows for clearing memory
9. Push the [ENTER] knob to clear the memory selected.
10. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
11. Turn the power off and on again.
7-12
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
In addition to alarm messages your equipment also displays error messages.
Error messages
Connection with the ETR was cut.
Error Message
Connection with the RADAR was cut.
Low Voltage! Internal Battery
Meaning Remedy
Network sounder disconnected.
•
Check that display unit where the sounder is
Radar disconnected. connected is turned on.
•
Check network sounder’s cabling.
•
Check that display unit where the radar is connected is turned on.
•
Check antenna cable.
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low.
Have a qualified technician replace the battery.
Check antenna cable.
No bearing pulse detected.
No bearing pulse from radar antenna.
No GPS fix!
GPS navigator is turned off or no GPS position data.
There may be obstacles around GPS antenna.
No position data.
No heading pulse detected.
An error may occur on
GP-310B/320B.
No heading pulse
Disconnect GPS cable from the display unit, and then contact your dealer.
Check heading sensor.
HEADING DATA MISSING! Check heading cable.
7-13
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
This page is intentionally left blank.
7-14
APPENDIX
Menu Overview
MENU key
Radar
MENU Key RADAR
DISPLAY
SETUP
EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE )
CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL , RNG&BRG-TRUE)
TUNING ( AUTO , MAN)
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM 000 ° , SECTOR 001 ° )), OFF )
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)
BACKGROUND COLOR ( BLACK/GREEN , BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,
DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN , MULTI-COLOR)
2ND ECHO REJECTION (ON , OFF )
WATCHMAN TIME ( 5 , 10, 20 minutes)
RANGE UNIT ( nm , km, sm)
TRAIL MODE (TRUE, RELATIVE )
D. BOX soft key
(DATABOX SIZE SMALL /LARGE, POSITION , WAYPOINT, COG , SOG , STW,
BEARING, RANGE, TIME TO GO, ETA, TEMPERATURE, DEPTH, TRIP
LOG , DATE, TIME, WIND)
RADAR
RANGE
SETUP#
0.125
/ 0.25
/ 0.5
/ 0.75
/1/ 1.5
/2/ 3 /4/ 6 /8/ 12 /16/ 24 / 36 / 48 /64/72 (nm & sm)
0.25
/ 0.5
# = Not used on GD-1900C.
/ 0.75
/ 1 /1.5/ 2 /3/ 4 /6/ 8 /12/ 16 /24/ 36 / 48 /64/72 (km)
Max. range
24 nm/sm, km = 1823C
36 nm/sm, km = 1833C
48 nm/sm, km = 1933C
64 nm/sm, km = 1943C
72 nm/sm, km = 1953C
ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP , OFF)
ARP SETUP
(Requires ARP circuit board in network radar
1800/1900.)
CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO
APP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE,
)
TRUE )
ARP VECTOR TIME (30 seconds; 1, 3, 6, 15, 30 minutes )
HISTORY INTERVAL ( OFF , 30 seconds; 1, 3, 6 minutes)
CPA ( OFF , 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 nm)
TCPA ( 30 seconds ; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 minutes)
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF )
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF )
1
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC
(Model 1700 series NavNet radar only), ECHO STRETCH, PULSE
LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF, TLL
OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM, TTM ON/OFF, WPT ON/OFF,
WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION (ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series
NavNet radar only), STBY/TX, RADAR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF,
CHANGE CNTRL)
* Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFT KEY 2, RINGS ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;
SOFT KEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFT KEY 5, RADAR SOURCE
A-1
APPENDIX
1
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
GENERAL
SETUP
2
Page 1
Page 2
NAV
OPTION
KEY BEEP ( ON , OFF)
LANGUAGE ( ENGLISH , OTHERS)
RANGE UNIT
( nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)
TEMPERATURE UNIT (
°
C,
°
F )
DEPTH UNIT (m, ft , fa, pb)
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA )
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA )
RESET TRIP LOG (YES, NO )
LAT/LON DISPLAY
(DD
°
MM. MM’
DD
°
MM. MMM’
DD
°
MM. MMMM’
DD
°
MM" SS.S")
TD DISPLAY ( LORAN C , DECCA)
SPEED ( SOG , STW)
POSITION DISPLAY ( LAT/LON , TD)
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS )
INFRARED REMOTE MODE ( A , B, C, D)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE )
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC )
MAGNETIC VARIATION ( AUTO 07.0
°
W, MANUAL)
NAV
SOURCE
SETTINGS
POSITION SOURCE
(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL )
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 seconds, 60 seconds )
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30-+13:30 hr, 00:00 )
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40 ° F - +40 ° F, 0 ° F )
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft, 0 ft )
GPS
SENSOR
SETTINGS
TD SETUP
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30-+13:30, 00:00 )
GEODETIC DATUM ( WGS-84 , OTHERS: See page A-10.)
POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 0 seconds )
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 5 seconds )
GPS SPEED AVERAGING (0 - 999 seconds, 60 seconds )
LATITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’N(S), 0.000’N )
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’W(E), 0.000’E)
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)
LATITUDE ( 45
°
35.000
’N)
LONGITUDE ( 125
°
00.000
’W)
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999 m, 5 m )
GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D )
COLD START (YES, NO )
GPS STATUS soft key
(Displays status of GPS satellites.)
WAAS MODE (On, Off )
WAAS SEARCH ( Auto , Manual)
WAAS ALARM (On,. Off )
CORRECTION DATA SET ( 02 )
WAAS SETUP soft key
(Only when GPS-320B is connected.)
LORAN-C GRI ( 9940: 11-27 ( US west coast ))
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9-+999.9
µ s, 000.0
µ s )
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9-+999.9
µ s, 000.0
µ s )
DECCA CHAIN ( 01: R-G (S Baltic ))
CORRECTION 1 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane )
CORRECTION 2 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane )
A-2
APPENDIX
2
4
SYSTEM
SETUP
3
PORT
SETUP
GPS/NMEA
PORT
NMEA PORT
FURUNO GPS SENSOR
(YES, NO )
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0
)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD ° MM. MM’
DD ° MM. MMM’
DD ° MM. MMMM’)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO )
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
FURUNO GPS SENSOR
(YES, NO )
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0
)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD ° MM. MM’
DD ° MM. MMM’
DD ° MM. MMMM’)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO )
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PC/NMEA/
EXT. BUZZ
PORT
NMEA OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0
)
BAUD RATE
( 4800 , 9600, 19200,
bps))
BIT LENGTH (7 bits, 8 bits )
STOP BIT ( 1 bit , 2 bits)
PARITY
(EVEN, ODD, NONE )
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK
(Select data sentences to output to NavNet equipment. See * below. All sentences turned off in default setting.)
* = AAM, APB , BOD, BWR(BWC)#1, DPT(DBT)#2, GGA, GLL , GTD,
MTW, RMA, RMB , RMC , VHW, VTG , WPL, XTE, ZDA , HDT, HDG, MWV
#1= BWR for rhumb line, BWC for great circle
#2 = DBT for NMEA Ver. 1.5; DPT for NMEA Ver. 2.0
A-3
APPENDIX
4 3
DATA
TRANSFER
TEST &
CLEAR
MEMORY
I/O TEST
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST
TEST PATTERN
MEMORY
CLEAR
DISPLAY UNIT (YES, NO )
GPS SENSOR (YES, NO )*
NETWORK SOUNDER (YES, NO )**
HOT PAGE
& NAV DISP
SETUP
HOT PAGE SETUP (Configures HOT PAGE 1 to 6.)
NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP (Configures nav data displays.)
SIMULATION
SETUP
RADAR (SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE )
PLOTTER ((SIMULATION, LIVE )
SOUNDER (SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE )
SPEED (0.0-99 kt, 0 kt )
COURSE (8 FIGURE, DIRECTION 0.0-359.9
° , 000.0
°)
LATITUDE (85 ° 0.0’N-85 ° 0.0’, 45 ° 35.000’N )
LONGITUDE (180 ° 0.0’E-180 ° 0.0’W, 125 ° 00.000’W )
START DATE & TIME ( 00:00 01 APR 00 )
RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO )
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series network radar.
SELECT BPS soft key
4800
9600
19200 (bps)
UPLOAD/
DOWNLOAD
DATA
DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
MARKS & LINES)
UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
MARKS & LINES)
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA)
LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA)
RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA (Receive Yeoman data.)
RECEIVE DATA
VIA NETWORK
HOST NAME (PLOT1)
MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF )
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES (ON, OFF )
A-4
APPENDIX
Plotter
MENU Key CHART SETUP CHART OFFSET (offsets chart position.)
TRACKS
& MARKS
CONTROL
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP ( ON , OFF)
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR ( RED , YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY ( ON , OFF)
TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE )
INTERVAL ( TIME , DISTANCE)
TIME INTERVAL (0 - 99m59s, 10 seconds )
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm, 0.1 nm )
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (0 - 8000 points, 2000 points )
TRACK soft key ( RESUME , HALT)
ERASE T & M soft key
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
MARK SETUP soft key
MARKS/LINES COLOR (RED, YELLOW , GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
= Default setting
MARKS SIZE ( LARGE , SMALL)
CHART
DETAILS
(FURUNO,
NavCharts TM )
LAT/LON GRID (RED, YELLOW, GREEN , LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE,
BLUE, WHITE, OFF)
TEXT INFORMATION ( ON , OFF)
WAYPOINTS ( LARGE , SMALL, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAMES ( ON , OFF)
CHART BORDER LINES ( ON , OFF)
LANDMASS ( BRT , DIM, OFF, RED, YELLOW , GREEN,
LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK )
NAVAIDS ( ON , OFF)
LIGHT SECTOR INFO ( ON , OFF)
OTHER SYMBOLS (OFF, RED, YELLOW, GREEN,
LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE )
MARKS SIZE ( LARGE , SMALL)
1 2
CNTOUR LINE soft key
DEPTH < 10m ( ON , OFF, RED )
DEPTH = 10m ( ON , OFF, YELLOW )
DEPTH > 10m ( ON , OFF, LIGHT BLUE )
DEPTH INFORMATION ( ON , OFF, RED )
* Colors: RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE,
BLUE, WHITE
A-5
APPENDIX
1 2
CHART
DETAILS
(C-MAP chart)
Page 1
Page 2
DEPTH INFO soft key
BATHYMETRIC LINE
( PLOTTER/OVERLAY ,
PLOTTER, OFF)
SPOT SOUNDING
( PLOTTER/OVERLAY ,
PLOTTER, OFF)
BOTTOM TYPE
( PLOTTER/OVERLAY ,
PLOTTER, OFF
DEPTH AREA LIMIT ( 33 ft )
BATHYMETRIC RANGE ( 0-33 ft )
WAYPOINT ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
WAYPOINT NAME ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
LAT/LON GRID ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
CHART BORDER LINE ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK )
PORTS & SERVICE ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
ATTENTION AREA ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , PLOTTER CONTOUR , OFF)
NAV LANE ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
LIGHT ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , PLOT/NO SECTOR , OFF)
BUOY & BEACON ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
SIGNAL ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
PLACE NAME ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
COMPASS ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
TIDE AND CURRENT ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
NATURAL FEATURE ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
RIVER & LAKE ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
CULTURAL FEATURE ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
LANDMARK ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
CHART GENERATION ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
NEW OBJECT ( PLOTTER/OVERLAY , PLOTTER , OFF)
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON (SINGLE, MULTIPLE )
INFORMATION LEVEL ( BASIC , DETAILED)
DEPTH INFO soft key (See left margin.)
PLOTTER
SETUP
3
WAYPOINT SWITCHING ( PERPENDICULAR , ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)
COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE , OFF)
SET GOTO METHOD ( 1 POINT , 35 POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as for D. BOX soft key on the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page A-1.)
A-6
APPENDIX
3
WAYPOINTS/
ROUTES
WAYPOINTS LOCAL LIST
ALPHANUMERIC LIST
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG
GOTO
NEW WPT
EDIT WPT
ERASE WPT
NEW WPT
NEW WPT
START POINT
ROUTES GOTO
NEW ROUTE
EDIT ROUTE
ERASE ROUTE
LOG
Destination is required.
RESTART
STOP/RELEASE
RVRSE/FORWARD
SPEED (Speed for ETA, 0-99 kt, GPS or manual input)
COORD TYPE
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
CREATE
VOYAGE-
BASED
ROUTE
NEW (BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)
SELECT ROUTE
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GOTO WPT, GOTO
ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT TRK,
ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST, D. BOX ON/OFF,
CHANGE CNTRL)
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)
* Defaut settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE:
SOFT KEY 3, RULER; SOFT KEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;
SOFT KEY 5, ALPHA LIST
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
A-7
APPENDIX
Sounder
MENU Key SOUNDER
MENU
SOUNDER
SYSTEM
SETUP
NOISE LIMITER ( OFF , LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)
CLUTTER (0-16, 09 AUTO )
WHITE MARKER (1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color), OFF )
ZOOM MARKER ( ON , OFF)
HUE (1-9, 1 )
SIGNAL LEVEL ( OFF , SL1-SL3, 8 color, monochrome, SL1-SL6, 16 color)
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1 , 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF )
SPD SENSING PIC ADV (ON, OFF )
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on plotter menu. See page A-2.)
FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW )
TRANSMISSION (OFF, ON )
TVG 200 kHz (0 - 9, 3 )
TVG 50 kHz (0 - 9, 3 )
ECHO OFFSET 200 kHz (-50 - +50, 0 )
ECHO OFFSET 50 kHz (-50 - +50, 0 )
BOTTOM LEVEL 200 kHz (-100 - +100, 0 )
BOTTOM LEVEL 50 kHz (-100 - +100, 0 )
KP PULSE ( INTERNAL , EXTERNAL)
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4)
TLL OUTPUT ( ON , OFF)
SOUNDER
RANGE
SETUP
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP#
SENSOR SETUP soft key
SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%, 0% )
TEMP. CALIBRATION (-40 ° F - +40 ° F, 0 ° F )
DEPTH CALIBRATION ( -15 - +90 ft, 0 ft )
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s, 0 m/s )
RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*
ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m,
; 7-400 ft,
6 m ; 10 ft,
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
30 ft
20 ft
; 1-60 fa, 10 fa
; 2 fa, 3 fa:
; 1-70 P/B,
3 fa
SOFT KEY 1- SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN 200 kHz, GAIN 50 kHz, SHIFT, NOISE
LIMITER, CLUTTER, WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL,
PICTURE ADV, TEMP. GRAPH, TVG 200 kHz, TVG 50 kHz, OFFSET
200K, OFFSET 50K, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE, TLL
OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL)
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)
10 P/B
; 2 P/B, 3 P/B:
)
3 P/B )
* = Default sounder ranges
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8
5 m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m
15 ft
3 fa
30 ft
5 fa
60 ft
10 fa
120 ft
20 fa
200 ft
40 fa
400 ft
80 fa
1000 ft
150 fa
4000 ft
650 fa
3 P/B 5 P/B 10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B 100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B
# Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFT KEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFT KEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL:
SOFT KEY 4, NOISE LIMITER, SOFT KEY 5, PICTURE ADV
A-8
EXT VIDEO
MENU Key CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
ALARM key
Radar Alarms
ALARM key SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)
Plotter Alarms
ALARM key
Sounder Alarms
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ , OFF)
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF , default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm) )
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF , default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm) )
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF )
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF , default range: 0.050 nm(km/sm) )
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF )
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF )
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF )
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF )
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
ALARM key AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ , OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF )
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF )
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF )
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF )
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
APPENDIX
A-9
APPENDIX
Geodetic Chart List
001: WGS84
002: WGS72
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)
004: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value
006: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island
007: ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)
008: : Ethiopia
009: : Mall
010: : Senegal
011: : Sudan
012: AFG : Somalia
013: AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island
014: ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island
015: ARC 1950 : Mean Value
016: : Botswana
017: : Lesotho
018: : Malawi
019: : Swaziland
020: : Zaire
021: : Zambia
022: : Zimbabwe
023: ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)
024: : Kenya
025: : Tanzania
026: ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island
027: ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island
028: ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island
029: ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island
030: ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island
031: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands
033: BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands
034: BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombia
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands
037: CAPE : South Africa
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)
041: CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay
042: CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil
043: DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe
047: : Cyprus
048: : Egypt
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands
051: : Greece
052: : Iran
053: : Italy Sardinia
054: : Italy Sicily
055: : Norway and Finland
056: : Portugal and Spain
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value
058: GANDAJIKA BASE : Republic of Maldives
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island
061: GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island
062: HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland
067: ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island
069: KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore
072: LA REUNION : Mascarene Island
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)
076: : Mindanao Island
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island
078: MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands
079: MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethiopia)
080: MERCHICH : Morocco
081: MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island
082: MINNA : Nigeria
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
084: : United Arab Emirates
085: : Saudi Arabia
086: NAMIBIA : Namibia
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago
088: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
089: : Eastern United States
090: : Alaska
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
094: : Alberta and British Columbia
095: : East Canada
096: : Manitoba and Ontario
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan
098: : Yukon
099: : Canal Zone
100: : Caribbean
101: : Central America
102: : Cuba
103: : Greenland
104: : Mexico
105: NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
106: : Canada
107: : CONUS
108: : Mexico, Central America
109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
112: : Hawaii
113: : Kaual
114: : Maui
115: : Oahu
116: OMAN : Oman
117: ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value
118: : England
119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales
120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands
121: : Wales
122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island
124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53° s)
125: PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
126: : Bolivia
127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)
128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)
129: : Colombia
130: : Ecuador
131: : Guyana
132: : Peru
133: : Venezuela
134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar
136: QORNOQ : South Greenland
137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
138: SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island
140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island
141: SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
142: : Argentina
143: : Bolivia
144: : Brazil
145: : Chile
146: : Colombia
147: : Ecuador
148: : Guyana
149: : Paraguay
150: : Peru
151: : Trinidad and Tobago
152: : Venezuela
153: SOUTH ASIA : Singapore
154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands
156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)
157: TOKYO : Japan
158: : Korea
159: : Okinawa
160: TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname
164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)
165: CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica
166: G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
167: HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan
168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar
170: YACARE : Uruguay
171: RT-90 : Sweden
172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia
A-10
World Time Chart
APPENDIX
A-11
APPENDIX
Icons
Icon Meaning
North marker. Points to North.
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.
Chart overenlarged.
Chart card not inserted.
Wrong chart card inserted.
Chart scale too small.
Plotter, radar, sounder alarm setting violated.
Track is not being recorded or plotted.
Chart offset applied.
S A
V E
Voyage-based route currently being created.
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer about replacement.
Simulation mode.
A-12
APPENDIX
SBAS Coverage Area
150 W 120 W 90 W 60 W 30 W 0 30 E 60 E 90 E 120 E 150 E
60 N
60 N
40 N
20 N
0
20 S
WAAS
122 120
EGNOS
131
MSAS
40 N
20 N
134
0
20 S
40 S
40 S
60 S
60 S
150 W 120 W 90 W 60 W 30 W 0 30 E 60 E 90 E 120 E 150 E
Satellite, Region Position
120, AOR-E 15.5 W
122, AOR-W 54 W
131, IOR 64.5 E
134, POR 178E
Accuracy may be affected when using a GEO satellite within current service area.
A-13
SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1823C/1833C/1933C/1943C/1953C
1. GENERAL
1.1 Indication System PPI Daylight display, raster scan, color LCD
1.2 Range, Pulse length (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)
Range (nm) Pulse length (
µ s) PRR (Hz approx.)
0.125 to 1.5
1.5 to 3
3 to 72*
0.08
0.3
0.8
2100
1200
600
*Maximum Range: M1823C: 24nm, M1833C: 36nm, M1933C: 48nm, M1943C: 64nm,
M1953C: 72nm
1.3 Range Resolution
1.4 Bearing Resolution
20 m
M1823C: 6.7°, M1833C: 4.0°, M1933C: 2.4°, M1943C: 1.9°,
1.5 Minimum Range
1.6 Bearing Accuracy
M1953C: 1.9° (XN12A), 1.2° (XN13A)
27 m
± 1°
1.7 Range Ring Accuracy 0.9 % of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater
2. SCANNER UNIT
2.1 MODEL1823C:
2.1.1 Radiator
2.1.2 Polarization
2.1.3 Antenna Rotation
2.1.4 Radiator Length
Micro-strip
Horizontal
30/24 rpm nominal (for short/long range)
45 cm
2.1.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 5.2°
2.1.6 Vertical Beamwidth 25°
2.1.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -19 dB or less (within ± 20º of main-lobe)
-21 dB or less ( ± 20º of main-lobe or more)
2.2 MODEL1833C:
2.2.1 Radiator
2.2.2 Polarization
2.2.3 Antenna Rotation
2.2.4 Radiator Length
Printed waveguide array
Horizontal
24 rpm nominal
60 cm
2.2.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 3.9°
2.2.6 Vertical Beamwidth 20°
2.2.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -18 dB or less (within ± 20° of main-lobe)
-23 dB or less ( ± 20° of main-lobe or more)
SP - 1 E3503S02F
2.3 MODEL1933C:
2.3.1 Radiator
2.3.2 Polarization
2.3.3 Antenna Rotation
2.3.4 Radiator Length
Slotted waveguide array
Horizontal
24 or 48 rpm nominal
High brilliance monitor: 24 rpm nominal only
100 cm (XN10)
2.3.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 2.4°
2.3.6 Vertical Beamwidth 27°
2.3.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -20 dB or less (within ± 20° of main-lobe)
-28 dB or less ( ± 20° of main-lobe or more)
2.4 MODEL1943C:
2.4.1 Radiator
2.4.2 Polarization
2.4.3 Antenna Rotation
2.4.4 Radiator Length
Slotted waveguide array
Horizontal
24 or 48 rpm nominal
High brilliance monitor: 24 rpm nominal only
120 cm (XN12)
2.4.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 1.9°
2.4.6 Vertical Beamwidth 22°
2.4.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -24 dB or less (within ± 20° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less ( ± 20° of main-lobe or more)
2.5 MODEL1953C:
2.5.1 Radiator
2.5.2 Polarization
2.5.3 Antenna Rotation
2.5.4 Radiator Length
Slotted waveguide array
Horizontal
24 or 48 rpm nominal
120 cm (XN12), 180 cm (XN13, 24rpm only)
2.5.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 1.9° (XN12), 1.2° (XN13)
2.5.6 Vertical Beamwidth 22°
2.5.7 Sidelobe Attenuation
XN12: -24 dB or less (within ± 20° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less ( ± 20° of main-lobe or more)
XN13: -24 dB or less (within ± 10° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less ( ± 10° of main-lobe or more)
3. TRANSCEIVER MODULE
3.1. Frequency and Modulation 9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N
3.2. Peak Output Power M1823C: 2.2 kW nominal,
M1833C/1933C: 4 kW nominal,
M1943C: 6 kW nominal, M1953C: 12 kW nominal
SP - 2 E3503S02F
3.3. Modulator FET Switching Method
3.4. Intermediate Frequency 60 MHz
3.5. Tuning
3.6. Receiver Front End
3.7. Bandwidth
3.8. Duplexer
3.9. Warming up
4. DISPLAY UNIT
Automatic or manual
MIC (Microwave IC)
Tx pulselength 0.08
µ s and 0.3
µ s: 25 MHz
Tx pulselength 0.8
µ s: 3 MHz
Circulator with diode limiter
90 s approx.
4.1. Display 10.4-inch rectangular TFT color LCD
640(H) x 480(V) dots, Effective radar display dia.: 152 mm
4.2. Range, Range Ring Interval (RI), Number of Rings
Range (nm) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72
RI (nm) 0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
Rings 2 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4
Maximum range: M1823C: 24nm, M1833C: 36nm, M1933C: 48nm, M1943C: 64nm, M1953C: 72nm
4.3.Markers Heading Line, Bearing Scale, Range Rings,
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Alarm Zone, Waypoint Mark (navigation input required)
4.4.Alphanumeric Indications Range, Range Ring Interval, Interference Rejection (IR),
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Stand-by (ST-BY), Echo Averaging (EAV), TX Pulse width
Guard Alarm (G(IN), G(OUT)), Echo Stretch (ES),
4.5. Input Data
Own ship’s position:
Ship’s speed:
Bearing (True):
Bearing (Magnetic):
Course:
Water depth:
Wind:
Water Temperature:
Time:
Range and Bearing to Cursor or Cursor Position,
Echo Trailing (TRAIL), Trailing Time,
Data Box (Position, COG, SOG, STW etc. selectable on menu)
IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0)
GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
HDT>HDG
*1
>HDM
*1
>VHW
HDM>HDG
*1
>HDT
*1
>VHW
RMC>RMA>VTG
DPT>DBT>DBS>DBK
MWV>VWT>VWR
MTW
ZDA
*1
: calculated by magnetic deviation
SP - 3 E3503S02F
4.6. Output Data
Alarm signal
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5
5. PLOTTER FUNCTION
12 VDC, 100 mA or less
GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW, MTW,
DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required),
TLL (L/L, Heading data required), TTM (ARPA required)
5.1. Projection
5.2. Usable Area
5.3. Effective Area
5.4. Display pixels
Mercator
85 latitude or below
211.2 x 158.4 mm
640 x 480 dots
5.5. Position Indication Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
5.6. Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
5.7. Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
5.8. Colors
5.9. Memory Capacity
5.10. Storage Capacity
5.11. MOB
5.12. Quick Routes
5.13. Electronic Chart
5.14. Alarms
6. POWER SUPPLY
6.1. Rated Voltage/Current
M1823C
M1833C
M1933C (24rpm)
M1933C (48rpm)
M1943C (24rpm)
M1943C (48rpm)
M1953C (24rpm)
M1953C (48rpm)
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
1 point
1 course with 35 waypoints max.
FURUNO chart card or NAVIONICS chart card available
C-MAP chart card also available for C-MAP NT Model
Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required)
12-24 VDC: 7.5-3.7 A
12-24 VDC: 5.3-2.6 A (6.4-3.1 A)
12-24 VDC: 5.6-2.7 A (6.7-3.2 A)
12-24 VDC: 7.5-3.6 A
12-24 VDC: 6.3-3.1 A (7.4-3.5 A)
12-24 VDC: 8.1-3.8 A
12-24 VDC: 8.6-4.3 A
12-24 VDC: 10.3-5.1 A
( ): for high brilliance monitor
SP - 4 E3503S02F
6.2. Rectifier (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1. Ambient Temperature Scanner Unit: -25°C to +70°C
7.2. Relative Humidity
Display Unit: -15°C to +55°C
Remote Controller: +5°C to +45°C
Power Supply Unit: -15°C to +55°C
93 % or less at +40°C
7.3. Waterproofing
7.4. Bearing Vibration
8. COATING COLOR
8.1. Display Unit
8.2. Scanner Unit
Scanner Unit: IPX6
Display Unit: IPX5 (External monitor connected: IPX0)
Remote Controller, Power Supply Unit: IPX0
IEC 60945-3rd
N3.0
M1823C/1833C N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)
M1933C/1943C/1953C N9.5
9. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE
9.1. Display Unit
9.2. Scanner Unit
Standard: 0.60 m Steering: 0.40 m
M1823C/1833C: Standard: 0.90 m Steering: 0.70 m
M1933C/1943C/1953C: Standard: 1.00 m Steering: 0.75 m
SP - 5 E3503S02F
SPECIFICATIONS OF VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1900C
1. DISPLAY UNIT
1.1. Indication System
1.2. Display
1.3. Input Data
Own ship’s position:
Ship’s speed:
Bearing (True):
Bearing (Magnetic):
Course:
Water depth:
Wind:
Water Temperature:
Time:
1.4. Output Data
PPI Daylight display, raster scan, color LCD
10.4-inch rectangular TFT color LCD, 640(H) x 480(V) dots
IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0)
GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
HDT>HDG
*1
HDM>HDG
*1
>HDM
*1
>VHW
>HDT
*1
RMC>RMA>VTG
>VHW
DPT>DBT>DBS>DBK
MWV>VWT>VWR
MTW
ZDA
*1
: calculated by magnetic deviation
Alarm signal
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5
12 VDC, 100 mA or less
GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW, MTW,
DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required), TTM (ARPA required)
2. PLOTTER FUNCTION
2.1. Projection
2.2. Usable Area
2.3. Effective Area
2.4. Display pixels
Mercator
85 latitude or below
211.2 x 158.4 mm
640 x 480 dots
2.5. Position Indication Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
2.6. Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
2.7. Track Display
2.8. Colors
2.9. Memory Capacity
2.10. Storage Capacity
2.11. MOB
2.12. Quick Routes
2.13. Electronic Chart
Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
1 point
1 course with 35 waypoints max.
FURUNO chart card or NAVIONICS chart card available
C-MAP chart card also available for C-MAP NT Model
SP - 6 E3503S02F
2.14. Alarms Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required)
3. POWER SUPPLY
3.1. Rated Voltage/Current 12-24 VDC: 2.1-1.1 A (3.1-1.6 A)
( ): for high brilliance monitor
3.2. Rectifier (option) PR-62: 100/110/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
4. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
4.1. Ambient Temperature -15°C to +55°C
4.2. Relative Humidity
4.3. Waterproofing
93 % or less at +40°C
IPX5
4.4. Bearing Vibration
5. COATING COLOR
5.1. Display Unit
IEC 60945-3rd
N3.0
6. COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE
6.1. Display Unit Standard: 1.00 m Steering: 0.80 m
SP - 7 E3503S02F
INDEX
A
A/C RAIN ........................................................2-5
A/C SEA ..........................................................2-4
ACQ soft key.................................................2-35
ALARM key plotter ........................................................3-52 radar..........................................................2-29 sounder .....................................................4-20
Alarms anchor watch ............................................3-54 arrival ........................................................3-53 audio .........................................................3-52 bottom .......................................................4-21
CPA/TCPA ................................................2-42 fish ............................................................4-21 fish(B/L).....................................................4-22 guard.........................................................2-29 heading missing data ..................................2-8 lost target ..................................................2-43 messages..................................................3-59 messages (plotter) ....................................3-59 messages (sounder) .................................4-25 proximity....................................................3-56 speed ........................................................3-55 trip .............................................................3-56 water temperature.....................................4-23
XTE (cross track error) .............................3-55
Anchor watch alarm ......................................3-54
Antenna height (GPS Receiver GP-310B)....5-24
ARP acquisition of targets .................................2-36 activating...................................................2-35
ARP SETUP menu....................................2-35
CPA/TCPA alarm.......................................2-42 data ...........................................................2-41 deactivating...............................................2-35 lost target alarm ........................................2-43 past position display .................................2-40 test ..............................................................7-8 tracking termination ..................................2-38 vector ........................................................2-39
Arrival alarm ..................................................3-53
A-scope display...............................................4-7
Audio alarm................................................... 3-52
Auto course-up mode ..................................... 3-8
AUTO S.SPD soft key................................... 2-20
AUTO/D. BOX soft key ................................... 4-9
B
Battery replacement ....................................... 7-1
Bearing measurement by EBL...................... 2-14
Bearing reference ........................................... 5-3
Bottom alarm ................................................ 4-21
Bottom discrimination display ......................... 4-7
Bottom echo.................................................. 4-26
Bottom-lock display......................................... 4-6
Bottom-zoom display ...................................... 4-5
Brilliance ......................................................... 1-7
C
CENTER soft key.......................................... 1-13
CHART DETAILS menu................................ 5-13
CHART OFFSET soft key............................. 5-12
Charts
C-MAP chart attributes ............................. 5-15 cursor and data display (C-MAP) ............. 3-14 data for aids to navigation ........................ 3-12
FURUNO chart attributes ......................... 5-14 icon data (C-MAP) .................................... 3-15 icons ......................................................... 3-10 indices....................................................... 3-11 inserting ...................................................... 1-5
NavCharts
TM
chart attributes .................... 5-14 offsetting ................................................... 5-12 port service icons...................................... 3-13 symbols for FURUNO, NavCharts
TM
......
3-12 tide information (C-MAP) .......................... 3-16
CLEAR ALARM soft key ............................... 4-24
Clutter rejector .............................................. 4-14
C-MAP charts attributes ................................................... 5-15 cursor and data display ............................ 3-14 icon data ................................................... 3-15 tide information ......................................... 3-16
CNTOUR LINE soft key ................................ 5-14
Cold start (GPS Receiver GP-310B) ............ 5-24
Index-1
INDEX
Colors radar display ...............................................5-5 radar echoes ...............................................5-5 sounder echoes ........................................4-19
Compass display.............................................3-3
Controls display unit ..................................................1-2 remote controller .........................................1-4
Course-up mode plotter ..........................................................3-8 radar............................................................2-9
CPA/TCPA alarm ...........................................2-42
Cursor display format..............................................5-4 shifting.......................................................1-13
CURSOR soft key .........................................2-18
D
Data boxes erasing ......................................................1-16 hiding.........................................................1-15 rearranging................................................1-16 setup .........................................................5-18 showing .....................................................1-15
DEPTH INFO soft key ...................................5-17
Depth measurement......................................4-12
Depth source...................................................5-2
Depth unit ........................................................5-2
Diagnostics
ARP test ......................................................7-8 display unit test ...........................................7-7
GPS sensor test ..........................................7-7 keyboard test ............................................7-10 network sounder test...................................7-8 test menu ....................................................7-6 test pattern ..................................................7-9
DISP key .......................................................1-10
Display modes.................................................1-9
Display unit test...............................................7-7
DISPLY MODE soft key ..................................4-2
Downloading data ...........................................6-5
Dual frequency display....................................4-4
E
E. AVG soft key .............................................2-27
E. STR soft key .............................................2-26
EBL reference .................................................5-4
EBL soft key ..................................................2-14
EBL/VRM key....................2-13, 2-14, 2-21, 2-22
Index-2
Echo averaging .............................................2-27
Echo offset (sounder)....................................5-29
Echo stretch ..................................................2-26
Echo trails color ..........................................................2-25 mode .........................................................2-25 starting ......................................................2-24 time ...........................................................2-23
EDIT XT-LMT soft key..............................3-4, 3-5
Error messages.............................................7-13
ETA calculation .............................................3-50
F
Fish alarm sensitivity ..................................................5-28 setting .......................................................4-21
Fish alarm (B/L) sensitivity ..................................................5-28 setting .......................................................4-22
Fish school echo ...........................................4-27
Fix mode (GPS Receiver GP-310B) .............5-24
Formatting memory cards...............................6-1
FREQ 50/200 soft key ....................................4-3
Function keys function execution.....................................1-17 setup (plotter)............................................5-10 setup (radar) ...............................................5-7 setup (sounder).........................................5-32
Fuse replacement ...........................................7-2
G
GAIN key radar ...........................................................2-2 sounder ............................................4-10, 4-11
GENERAL SETUP menu................................5-1
Geodetic datum (GPS Receiver GP-310B) ..5-22
Geodetic datum codes................................. A-10
GPS Receiver GP-310B setup .....................5-22
GPS sensor (GP-310B) test ...........................7-7
GPS SETUP menu .......................................5-22
GPS status display........................................ 7-11
Guard alarm cancelling ..................................................2-30 setting .......................................................2-29
H
Heading line ..................................................2-16
Head-up mode ................................................2-9
Highway display ..............................................3-5
HIWAY CNTRL soft key ..................................3-5
HL OFF soft key ............................................2-16
Hot page setup..............................................5-19
Hue radar, plotter................................................1-8 sounder .....................................................4-19
I
I. REJ. soft key..............................................2-17
Icons............................................................. A-12
Interference rejection radar..........................................................2-17 sounder .....................................................4-13
K
Keyboard test ................................................7-10
Keying pulse .................................................5-29
L
Language ........................................................5-2
Latitude, longitude display ..............................5-2
Lines entering .....................................................3-25 erasing ......................................................3-27 type ...........................................................3-26
LOAD DATA menu ..........................................6-4
Local time
GPS Receiver GP-310B ...........................5-22 navigator (GPS, Loran C) .........................5-21
Lost target alarm ...........................................2-43
M
Magnetic variation...........................................5-3
Maintenance battery replacement ....................................7-1 fuse replacement ........................................7-2 preventive ...................................................7-1 trackball.......................................................7-2
Marker-zoom display.......................................4-5
Marks color ..........................................................3-25 entering .....................................................3-25 erasing all..................................................3-27 erasing individual ......................................3-27 shape ........................................................3-25
Memory clearing .....................................................7-12 testing .........................................................7-6
INDEX
Memory cards error messages........................................... 6-3 formatting.................................................... 6-1 playing back................................................ 6-4 saving data to ............................................. 6-2
Memory I/O test .............................................. 7-6
Menu tree........................................................A-1
Messages memory cards ............................................. 6-3 plotter alarms............................................ 3-59 sounder alarms......................................... 4-25
MOB mark..................................................... 1-14
Multiple echoes (radar) ................................. 2-46
N
Nav data display ............................................. 3-6
NAV DATA menu........................................... 5-27
Nav data source............................................ 5-21
Nav data window ............................................ 3-2
NAV OPTION menu...................................... 5-21
Navigation canceling route navigation........................ 3-51 port, port services ..................................... 3-46 quick point ................................................ 3-44 restarting................................................... 3-49 routes........................................................ 3-48 switching waypoints in a route.................. 3-50 waypoints.................................................. 3-45
Navigator setup....................................5-21, 5-22
NavNet image source ............................................ 1-12 receiving data from ..................................... 6-9
Network sounder test...................................... 7-8
NEXT INFO soft key ............................3-58, 4-24
Noise limiter (sounder) ................................. 4-13
Noise rejection (radar) .................................. 2-16
North marker................................................. 2-16
North-up mode plotter.......................................................... 3-7 radar ......................................................... 2-10
O
Offset EBL .................................................... 2-21
OFFSET soft key .................................2-21, 2-22
P
Picture advance speed ................................. 4-17
PLOTTER SETUP menu ................................ 5-9
PLOTTR CNTRL soft key ............................. 1-11
Index-3
INDEX
Port, port services icons..........................................................3-13 navigating to..............................................3-46
Position offset (GPS Receiver GP-310B) .....5-23
Position smoothing (GPS Receiver
GP-310B) ..................................................5-23
POWER/BRILL key ................................. 1-6, 1-7
Presentation mode plotter ..........................................................3-7 radar............................................................2-8
Proximity alarm .............................................3-56
Pulselength (radar)..........................................2-7
R
Racon ............................................................2-50
RADAR SETTING menu .................................5-3
RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key .............................2-2
Range measurement by cursor (radar) ................2-12 measurement by range rings (radar) ........2-11 measurement by VRM (radar) ..................2-13 plotter ..........................................................3-9 radar............................................................2-6 setup (radar) ...............................................5-6 setup (sounder) .........................................5-31 unit of measurement ...................................5-2
RANGE key plotter ..........................................................3-9 radar............................................................2-6 sounder .....................................................4-10
Remote controller control description .......................................1-4 testing........................................................7-10
RESET XTE soft key............................... 3-4, 3-5
RINGS soft key .............................................2-11
Routes cancelling navigation of.............................3-51 connecting.................................................3-40 entering with cursor...................................3-37 entering with existing waypoints ...............3-36 erasing ......................................................3-43 following ....................................................3-48 inserting waypoint from plotter display......3-42 inserting waypoint from route list ..............3-41 removing waypoint from............................3-43 switching waypoints in route navigation....3-50 voyage based............................................3-38
S
SART ............................................................2-48
Satellite disable (GPS Receiver GP-310B) ..5-24
SAVE DATA menu...........................................6-1
SAVE/MOB key.............................................1-14
Second-track echoes (radar) ........................2-32
Sensor setup.................................................5-29
SENSOR SETUP menu................................5-30
SENSOR SETUP soft key ............................5-29
Shadow sectors ............................................2-47
Shift automatic (radar) ......................................2-20 manual (radar) ..........................................2-19 sounder ..................................................... 4-11
SHIFT soft key .....................................2-19, 4-11
Sidelobe echoes ...........................................2-46
Signal level erasure (sounder)......................4-15
SIM SETUP menu.........................................1-18
Simulation display.........................................1-18
Smoothing echoes (sounder)........................5-29
SNDR CNTRL soft key ................................. 1-11
Soft keys .........................................................1-3
Speed alarm..................................................3-55
Speed averaging
GPS Receiver GP-310B) ..........................5-23 navigator (GPS, Loran C) .........................5-21
Speed display..................................................5-2
Speed/course smoothing (GPS Receiver
GP-310B)..................................................5-23
SPLIT soft key.................................................4-8
System configuration ......................................... x
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder)................5-28
T
TARGET INFO soft key.................................2-41
TARGET soft key ..........................................2-23
TD display .......................................................5-2
TD setup
Decca........................................................5-26
Loran C .....................................................5-25
TD SETUP menu ..........................................5-25
Test menu .......................................................7-6
Test pattern .....................................................7-9
Time measurement (sounder) ......................4-12
Time notation ..................................................5-2
TLL data output (radar) .................................2-28
TLL OUTPUT key .........................................2-28
Index-4
Track displaying other targets' ............................3-19 displaying own ship's ................................3-18 erasing all own ship's................................3-24 erasing all targets' .....................................3-24 erasing own ship's by area .......................3-23 erasing own ship's by color.......................3-24 memory distribution setting.......................3-22 plotting interval..........................................3-21 plotting method .........................................3-21 plotting of own ship's.................................3-19
TRACK HALT soft key...................................3-19
TRACK RESUME soft key ............................3-19
Trackball cleaning.......................................................7-2 operation ...................................................1-13
TRAIL COLOR soft key.................................2-25
TRAIL ON/OFF soft key................................2-24
TRAIL soft key...............................................2-23
TRAIL TIME soft key .....................................2-23
Trip alarm ......................................................3-56
Trip distance resetting...................................3-60
Troubleshooting general ........................................................7-3 plotter ..........................................................7-4 radar............................................................7-3 sounder .......................................................7-5
True motion mode .........................................2-10
Tuning .............................................................2-2
TVG...............................................................5-29
Tx sector (radar) .............................................5-4
U
Uploading data ................................................6-5
V
Vector (ARP) .................................................2-39
Virtual image .................................................2-47
VRM (Variable Range Marker) radar..........................................................2-13 sounder .....................................................4-12
VRM soft key....................................... 2-14, 2-15
INDEX
W
WAAS ........................................................... 5-25
W. MAN soft key ........................................... 2-31
Watchman..................................................... 2-31
Water temperature alarm.............................. 4-23
Water temperature graph.............................. 4-25
Water temperature unit ................................... 5-2
Waypoint marker (radar)............................... 2-33
Waypoints changing size............................................ 3-34 color .......................................................... 3-29 editing from waypoint list .......................... 3-31 editing waypoint position .......................... 3-32 editing with cursor..................................... 3-31 entering at own ship position .................... 3-28 entering by range and bearing ................. 3-30 entering with cursor .................................. 3-28 erasing from the menu.............................. 3-33 erasing from waypoint list ......................... 3-33 erasing with cursor ................................... 3-33 loading from Yeoman.................................. 6-8 navigating to ............................................. 3-45 searching .................................................. 3-35 shape ........................................................ 3-29 switching in route navigation .................... 3-50
White marker ................................................ 4-16
World time chart............................................... 11
WPT MK soft key .......................................... 2-33
X
XTE (cross track error) alarm ....................... 3-55
XTE monitor.............................................3-4, 3-5
Y
Yeoman........................................................... 6-8
Z
Zero line ........................................................ 4-26
Zoom............................................................. 2-18
ZOOM/D. BOX soft key ................................ 2-18
Index-5

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- NavNet compatible
- Bright 10.4” screen
- User friendly operation
- Accepts FURUNO and Nav-charts™ charts
- Fast chart redraw
- Built-in NavNet interface